JP6739420B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game.

Patent Literature 1 describes a pachinko machine in which different jackpot probabilities are set according to set values.

JP-A-5-285258

The conventional technology is a gaming machine whose settings can be changed, but there is room for improvement in the control processing relating to the settings.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a technique capable of executing efficient control processing relating to setting.

The present invention adopts the following means for solving the above problems. The words in the following parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these. Further, the present invention can be an invention including at least one item for specifying each invention shown in the following solving means. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution means can be subordinated by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, or can be deleted by making a superordinate concept an element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

Solving means 1: The gaming machine of this solving means is capable of communicating with a main control device that controls the content of the game, and pays a game ball based on a payout command transmitted from the main control device. With a payout control device, the main control device, when a lottery trigger occurs during the game, a lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery, and a setting change capable of changing at least the winning probability of the predetermined lottery An apparatus, setting-related processing execution means for executing setting-related processing including at least one of a setting change processing executed when changing the setting and a setting reference processing executed when referring to the setting; During execution of related processing, by transmitting a prohibition command for prohibiting payout of game balls to the payout control device, prohibition process execution means for executing prohibition process for preventing the payout control device from paying out game balls It is a game machine characterized by including and.

The gaming machine of the present solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A main controller that controls the contents of the game is provided.
(2) A payout control device that can communicate with the main control device of the above (1) and that pays out game balls based on a payout command transmitted from the main control device of the above (1) is provided. The main controller and the payout controller can communicate with each other.

(3) When the lottery opportunity occurs during the game (when the game ball enters the starting winning port), the main control device of the above (1) executes a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery).

(4) The main controller of the above (1) includes at least a setting changing device capable of changing the setting relating to the winning probability of the predetermined lottery of the above (3). The setting change device is a device that switches settings, and is operated by operating buttons, levers, and other devices provided in the gaming machine. The setting means a combination of operating probabilities. Further, the operation probability means the probability that a combination of symbols that will cause the condition device to operate (which means that a special game will be executed) is displayed.

The setting changing device may be a device that can change the setting by adding other items in addition to the item (3) regarding the winning probability of the predetermined lottery. Further, the setting changing device may be a device that can change the setting relating to the exit.

(5) The main control device according to (1) above is configured to execute a setting-related process including at least one of a setting change process executed when changing a setting and a setting reference process executed when referring to a setting. A related process execution means is provided. The setting-related processing includes processing executed during setting change (setting change mode, setting change state) or setting reference (setting reference mode, setting reference state).

(6) The main control device of the above (1) transmits a prohibition command for prohibiting the payout of gaming balls to the payout control device of the above (2), while executing the setting related process of the above (5). Thus, the above-mentioned (2) payout control device is provided with a prohibition process execution means for executing a prohibition process for preventing the game balls from being paid out.

The prohibition command may be a setting change/setting reference start command or a payout operation stop command.
The prohibition cancellation command paired with the prohibition command may be a setting change/setting reference end command or a payout operation start command.

As described above, according to the present solving means, the main control device sends the prohibition command, so that the payout control device does not execute the payout of the game balls. Therefore, there are two devices such as the main control device and the payout control device. Nevertheless, with the setting only on the main controller side, it is possible not to execute the payout of the game balls during the execution of the setting related process. As a result, it is not necessary to modify the program of the payout control device, the overall control process can be simplified, and as a result, an efficient control process for setting can be executed.

Further, according to the present solving means, when the game machine has a function of a prohibition command (payout operation stop command) in advance, by effectively utilizing it, the game of the payout control device can be performed without changing the program. It is possible to control the payout of balls, and it is possible to execute efficient control processing relating to setting.

Solving means 2: In the gaming machine of the present solving means, in any one of the solving means described above, the payout control device transmits a start command to the main control device and receives a start confirmation command for the start command. By shifting from the payout impossible state to the payout possible state, paying out the game ball based on the payout command transmitted from the main control device in the payout possible state, the prohibition process execution means, to the payout control device. The gaming machine is characterized in that the payout control device is shifted to the payout impossible state by sending the prohibition command, and the payout control device is not allowed to pay out the game balls.

The following features are added to this solution.
(1) The payout control device transmits a start command (payout start command) to the main control device, and upon receiving a start confirmation command for the start command, shifts from the payout impossible state to the payout possible state and the payout possible state. At, the game ball is paid out based on the payout command transmitted from the main control device.

(2) The prohibition processing execution means transmits the prohibition command to the payout control device to shift the payout control device to the payout impossible state, and does not allow the payout control device to pay out the game balls.

According to the present solving means, the main control device (prohibition process executing means) transmits the prohibition command to the payout control device to shift the payout control device to the payout impossible state, and the payout control device receives the game ball. Since the payout is not executed, the payout of the payout control device can be easily prohibited only by the control regarding the command, and the efficient control processing regarding the setting can be executed.

Further, according to the present solving means, the main control device (prohibition processing executing means) is accompanied by transmitting the prohibition command to the payout control device, and the payout control device shifts to a state in which the command cannot be transmitted. This makes it possible for the main control unit to simplify the control process on the main control unit side because no command is sent from the payout control unit while the setting related process is being executed. it can.

Other solving means: In the gaming machine of the present solving means, in any one of the above-mentioned solving means, the payout control device is capable of paying out from the unpaid state after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the activation confirmation command. Transition to a state, the prohibition processing execution means transmits the prohibition command before the fixed time elapses after transmitting the activation confirmation command, and the payout control device changes from the payout impossible state to the payout possible state. It is a game machine characterized by limiting transfer.

The following features are added to this solution.
(1) The payout control device is in a payable state from a non-payable state (a state in which a game ball is paid out from a state in which a game ball is not paid out) after a lapse of a fixed time (after 5 seconds has elapsed) after receiving a start confirmation command. Move to.

(2) The main control device (prohibition processing execution means) transmits the prohibition command before the elapse of a certain time (5 seconds before) after transmitting the activation confirmation command, and the payout control device can perform the dispensation from the dispensable state. Restrict the transition to the state (do not transition to the payable state).

In the present solution means, the main control device (prohibition process execution means) transmits the prohibition command before the elapse of a fixed time after transmitting the activation confirmation command, and the payout control device shifts from the dispensable state to the dispensable state. In order to restrict that, it is possible to prevent the payout control device from paying out the game balls without changing the flow of sending the start confirmation command, suppressing the change of the program of the main control device, and setting efficiency. A good control process can be executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to execute efficient control processing relating to setting.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a game board unit alone. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices with which a pachinko machine was equipped. It is the block diagram which shows the functional constitution inside the production control control equipment. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the memory area which the main control CPU72 uses. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery. It is a figure which shows the state of a setting key, propriety of setting change, and propriety of insertion/removal. It is a flow chart which shows the example of the 1st procedure of CPU initialization processing (1/2). It is a flow chart which shows the example of the 1st procedure of CPU initialization processing (2/2). It is a figure which shows the command transmission timing of the 1st example of a procedure of CPU initialization processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of the 2nd procedure of CPU initialization processing (1/2). It is a flow chart which shows the example of the 2nd procedure of CPU initialization processing (2/2). It is a figure showing the command transmission timing of the example of the 2nd procedure of CPU initialization processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of main loop processing. It is a figure which shows the content of the process performed when a serial communication reception interrupt generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the content of the process performed when a timer interruption generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the content of the process performed when the interruption at the time of a power-off advance notice generate|occur|produces. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of serial communication reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of interruption processing at the time of a power failure notice. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of dynamic port output processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of performance display monitor output processing. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a timer interruption process and a dynamic port output process. It is a figure which shows the modification of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a setting change process (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a setting change process (2/2). It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of switch management processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special design memory renewal processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure example of 2nd special design memory renewal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of production judgment processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of special game management processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special design fluctuation pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of leaving (low-probability/high-probability non-time shortened state). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of leaving (low probability time shortened state). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of leaving (high probability time shortened state). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of leaving (special section). It is a figure showing an example of composition of a stop symbol selection table at the time of the 1st special symbol big hit. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a stop symbol selection table during the second special symbol big hit. It is a figure showing an example of a big hit time variation pattern selection table (low probability/high probability non-time shortened state). It is a figure which shows an example of a big hit time variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state). It is a figure showing an example of a big hit time variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortened state). It is a figure showing an example of a big hit time variation pattern selection table (special section). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the variation pattern determination process at the time of leaving. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of change pattern determination processing at the time of big hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of processing during special symbol stop display. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of special change management processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of the variable winning a prize device management processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of big winning opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of big winning opening opening and closing operation processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of big winning opening closing processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of end processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of special change frequency setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of the variable winning a prize device management processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of big winning opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of big winning opening opening and closing operation processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of big winning opening closing processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of end processing at the time of small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of LED display setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of the 1st procedure of the number calculation processing of addition. It is a flow chart which shows the example of the 2nd procedure of addition number calculation processing. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state and the number of shot balls. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of performance display monitor control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of sphere number addition processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of performance display monitor total division processing. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of processing of division task 1. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of processing of division tasks 2-8. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of processing of division task 9. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a performance display monitor 200. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a base section displayed on a performance display monitor 200. FIG. It is a figure explaining the calculation method of a base. It is a timing chart showing a setting-related processing basic operation (1/3). It is a timing chart which shows a setting related process basic operation (2/3). It is a timing chart which shows the basic operation|movement of a setting related process (3/3). It is a figure which shows the process example at the time of power activation (1st process example). It is a figure which shows the process example at the time of power activation (2nd process example). It is a figure which shows the process example at the time of power activation (3rd process example). It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of firing position management processing. It is a figure explaining the game flow in a non-time shortened state. It is a figure explaining the game flow in a time shortened state. It is the continuation figure which shows the example of the production image which corresponds to the fluctuation indication and the stop indication of the special design. It is a continuous diagram showing a flow of reach production executed at the time of a big hit (winning). It is the figure which shows the production example of challenge bonus production. It is a continuation diagram which shows a production example of a treasure challenge production partially. It is a continuous view showing an example of the effect of a firework rush. It is a continuation diagram which partially shows an example of an effect of a fireworks bonus effect. It is the continuation figure which partially shows the production example of normal bonus production. It is a continuous view showing an example of production in the coastal mode. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure example of production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of operation memory production management processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure example of production design management processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure example of production design fluctuation pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of change production pattern selection processing at the time of big hit. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of change production pattern selection processing at the time of leaving. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of mode production management processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of processing at the time of operation of a variable winning device.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator to perform a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game on the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium in which each one has a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

Here, in the present specification, the left side as viewed from the player seated so as to face the pachinko machine 1 is left, the right side as viewed from the player is right, and the upper side as viewed from the player is up. It is described that the lower side as viewed from the player is the bottom, the front side as viewed from the player is front, and the back side as viewed from the player is rear.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. When viewed from the front facing the player, the integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 has fasteners such as screws for island equipment (not shown) in the game arcade. It is fixed by using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at the lower position. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and each of these operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening/closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left end of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2, respectively. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 together with the locking tool. The opening of 7 is disabled.

A cylinder lock 6a with a key hole is provided on the right side edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts a dedicated key into the key hole and twists the cylinder lock 6a in the clockwise direction, the unified lock unit 9 is operated and the inner frame assembly 7 and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 in a state where the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 has a vertically elongated circular window 4a formed in the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached to the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via an attachment tool (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space where the game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

The tray unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper tray 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In this upper plate 6b, game balls (rental balls) lent to the player and game balls (prize balls) obtained by winning can be stored. Further, in the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper tray 6b. In the lower plate 6c, the game balls further paid out in a state where the upper plate 6b is full are stored. Note that the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (a model that is connected to a CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are different from the prize balls from the payout device unit 172 on the back side to the saucer unit 6 (upper). It is dispensed to the plate 6b or the lower plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a memory IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees) (For example, 125) game balls are rented out. For this reason, a frequency display section (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation section 14, and the frequency display section displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium loaded in the CR unit. It should be noted that the player can return the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although a CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model that is not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b in the upper position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by pushing the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e, for example, to the left to drop and discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c. The discharged game balls are received in, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed in the lower right part of the saucer unit 6. By operating the grip unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 to launch (striking) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launch device). The launched game ball rises along the left side edge from the lower edge of the game board unit 8, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails and windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and windmills. The structure of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure of front of frame]
In the integrated door unit 4, a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right lighting unit 49 are installed as components for production. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the right upper illumination unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 so as to be continuous below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right electric decoration unit 49, respectively. It extends so as to wrap around from the left and right edge portions of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface portion of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 50 and 52 are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of the built-in LED. Further, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 are respectively equipped with glass frame speakers 54 and 55. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

Further, in the center of the tray unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed at a position near the upper tray 6b. The effect switching button 45 can perform a plurality of types of operations (press once, press multiple times, repeatedly hit, hold down, etc.) and accept an operation input. The player switches the content of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by depressing the operation switching button 45 (operation input), for example, during the change of the symbol or the confirmation display of the big hit, Alternatively, some kind of effect (notice effect, probabilistic change promotion effect, promotion effect during major role, etc.) can be generated during the big hit game.

Further, around the effect switching button 45, a jog dial 45a is installed so as to surround the effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means, rotary selector). By rotating the jog dial 45a, the player can change the effect contents displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a firing control board set 174, a payout control board unit 176. , A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown)) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed.

A main controller is built in the main control board unit 170, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main controller.
The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main control device so as to be visible in the upper left area of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204. ..

The performance display monitor 200 (base display device) displays the base. The performance display monitor 200 also displays the setting value (setting value).

The four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED has seven segments capable of displaying a decimal Arabic numeral and a dot segment located at the lower right thereof. It is composed by.
The performance display monitor 200 is visible through the transparent case that covers the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main controller is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a setting key keyhole 306. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used when performing RAM clear (initialization of the RAM 76), that is, initialization of the RAM (RWM) provided in the main control device. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing the setting or referring to the setting.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so that it can be pressed through a through hole formed in a transparent case that covers the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. The setting key keyhole 306 is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (the transparent case surrounds the key cylinder). Therefore, the setting key can be inserted and rotated while the transparent case remains sealed.

The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch for clearing the RAM, and when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed, the RAM clear signal is input to the main control device 70 and the payout control device 92 to perform the RAM clear processing. Is executed. The RAM clear switch 304 may be provided in the power supply control unit 162. In addition, when the RAM control signal is not input to the payout control device 92 and the main control device 70 accepts the input of the RAM clear signal, the main control device 70 transmits a RAM clear command to the payout control device 92. Good.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key hole 306 shown in FIG. 2 are merely examples, and they can be arranged at arbitrary positions. The performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main controller and connected to the main controller.

The above-mentioned payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference numeral), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed at the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, it is possible to store the game balls supplied from the supply route (not shown). The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game balls sent from the payout device unit 172 toward the saucer unit 6 on the front surface side.

Further, the external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from this external terminal board 160, the game of the pachinko machine 1 is played. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation frequency information, big hit information, starting opening information, etc.) indicating the progress status and maintenance status, etc. are output to the external electronic device. ing.

The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal similarly installed in the island facility to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front surface side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit when the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-mentioned game area 8a is formed inside a firing rail (no reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. The left side portion of the game area 8a is a first game area (left hitting area) used in a normal game state (low probability non-time shortened state) or latent probability variation state (high probability non-time shortened state), and the game area 8a. The right part of is a second game area (right hit area, specific area) used in an advantageous game state (a big hit game state, a small hit game state, a low probability time reduction state, a high probability time reduction state, etc.) .. Further, in the game area 8a, a medium start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, ordinary winning openings 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Of these, the middle start winning hole 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a.
The second variable winning device 31, the starting gate 20, the first variable winning device 30, and the variable starting winning device 28 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side of the game area 8a.

The three normal winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged on the left side of the game area 8a, and the one normal winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is between the starting gate 20 and the first variable winning device 30. It is arranged.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters the middle start prize hole 26, the normal prize holes 22 and 24 in the process of its flow, or the second variable prize device 31 during the opening operation. , Passing through the starting gate 20, entering the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, or entering the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation.

Here, there is a possibility that the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a mainly enters the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a mainly enter the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation, pass through the starting gate 20, or enter the normal winning opening 24. There is a possibility that the player will enter the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation or the variable start winning device 28 during the opening operation.

The game ball that has passed through the starting gate 20 continues to flow down in the game area 8a, but the middle starting winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device. The game balls that have entered the device 31 are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material that constitutes the game board unit 8, transparent plate, etc.).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the structure of the game area 8a (board surface), when a game ball is to be inserted into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, an area on the left side in the gaming area 8a (left hitting) It is necessary to hit a game ball in the area) (execute a so-called "left hit").

On the other hand, in the case of entering a game ball into the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning opening 24, the area on the right side in the game area 8a (the right-handed area) ) Must be hit with a game ball (a so-called "right hit" is executed).

The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner), and accordingly, the right starting winning opening 28a (starting winning opening) is entered. Enables a ball (normal electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has one opening/closing member 28b, and the opening/closing member 28b reciprocates in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening/closing member 28b is in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time, the ball cannot enter the right start winning opening 28a (there is no state in which a game ball can enter). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the opening/closing member 28b is displaced from the closed position toward the open position (tilted to the right) and opens the right starting winning opening 28a. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the game balls can be entered, and the right starting winning port 28a can be entered (variable starting winning means). At this time, the opening/closing member 28b also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the starting winning opening 28a.

The first variable winning device 30 is, when the prescribed condition is satisfied (for example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of big hit, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of small hit, the second When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "5 round normal symbol" or "5 round probability variation symbol"), it is possible to win the first big winning opening 30b (upper special winning opening) (special Electric accessory, first special prize event generating means).

The first variable winning device 30 has one opening/closing member 30a, and the opening/closing member 30a reciprocates in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening/closing member 30a is in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time, the ball cannot enter the first big winning opening 30b (there is no state in which a game ball can enter). On the other hand, when the first variable winning device 30 operates, the opening/closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position toward the open position (tilted to the left), and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. In the meantime, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the game balls can be entered, and can enter the first special winning opening 30b. At this time, the opening/closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the first big winning opening 30b.

The second variable winning device 31, when special conditions are satisfied (for example, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit (the second special symbol is "5 round normal symbol" or "5 round positive change"). Except when it is stopped and displayed in the form of "design")), and enables winning of the second special winning opening 31b (lower special winning opening) (special electric auditors, second special winning event occurrence) means).

The second variable winning device 31 has one opening/closing member 31a, and the opening/closing member 31a reciprocates in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening/closing member 31a is in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time, the ball cannot enter the second special winning opening 31b (there is no state in which a game ball can enter). On the other hand, when the second variable winning device 31 operates, the opening/closing member 31a is displaced from the closed position toward the open position (tilted to the left), and the second special winning opening 31b is opened. During this time, the second variable winning a prize device 31 is in a state in which the game balls can be entered, and can enter the second special winning opening 31b. At this time, the opening/closing member 31a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the second special winning opening 31b.

The arrangement of the obstacle nails and the shape of the structure installed in the game board unit 8 are basically the variable start winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28a when opened) and the first variable winning device 30 (first opening winning device). 1 big winning hole 30b), the second variable winning device 31 (the second big winning opening 31b when opened) is a mode that does not extremely hinder the flow of the game ball, but the variable start while the game ball is open The winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28a), the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning opening 30b), the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) does not necessarily enter the ball, Incoming balls are randomly generated.

The above-mentioned effect unit 40 is installed in the game board unit 8 from its central position to the right side portion. The effect unit 40 has its upper edge 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and is provided with various decorative parts 40b, 40c inside thereof. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitting device (LED or the like). .. Further, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols are displayed on the liquid crystal indicator 42. .. In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin plate (for example, an acrylic board), decorativeness is added by various decorative bodies (including movable bodies and light-emitting bodies) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. can do.

In addition, inside the effect unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached together with a movable object 40f for effect (for example, an animal character). The movable body 40f for effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image on the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By the effect using the movable body 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

A ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a flows into the ball guide passage 40d at random, the ball guide passage 40d rolls through the inside. It is discharged onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, and here the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning hole 26 located directly below the game ball. ..

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls that have not entered (winned) the various winning ports are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, the normal winning openings 22, 24, the medium starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31 are also driven into the game area 8a. All the played game balls are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply route of island equipment (not shown).

FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (right side position within the window 4a). That is, in the game board unit 8, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol working memory lamp 33a are provided at the right side position in the window 4a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided. Of these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the normal symbol by turning on or off the lamp. The normal symbol working memory lamp 33a displays a memory number of 0 to 4 by a combination of turning off or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs), for example. For example, in the display mode in which both the two lamps are turned off, the number of memories is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of memories is 1 is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memory numbers are displayed, three memory numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is blinked and another lamp is turned on, and four memory numbers are displayed in the display mode in which two lamps are both blinked. For example, displaying individual pieces. Although two lamps (LED) are used here, four lamps (LED) may be used to configure the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a. In this case, the working memory number can be displayed by the number of lamps that are turned on.

The normal symbol working memory lamp 33a is changed to a display mode after being increased by one in order to remember that each time the game ball passes through the above-mentioned starting gate 20, a passage that triggers the working lottery occurs. Then (up to 4 pieces at maximum), with the passage as a trigger, each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the display mode is changed to one after the decrease. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memory is 0), the game ball passes through the starting gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (at the time of stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum four) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, each 7 segment LED (with a dot), the corresponding 1st special symbol or the second special symbol variable state and stop state are displayed. Can be done (design display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are geometrically (for example, circular) arranged.

Further, the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a are, for example, 0 to 4 pieces each according to a display mode configured by a combination of two lamps (LEDs) being turned off or turned on or blinking. The memory number of is displayed (memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which both the two lamps are turned off, the number of memories is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of memories is 1 is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memory numbers are displayed, three memory numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is blinked and another lamp is turned on, and four memory numbers are displayed in the display mode in which two lamps are both blinked. For example, displaying individual pieces.

The first special symbol working memory lamp 34a is increased by one in order to remember that each time a game ball enters the middle starting prize hole 26, it is remembered that the game ball has entered the middle starting prize hole 26. It changes to a mode (up to 4), and when the special ball starts to change when the ball is entered, it changes to a display mode after decreasing by one. Further, the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a is increased one by one in the sense that each time the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the fact that the game ball has entered the right starting winning opening 28a is stored. Display mode (up to 4), and each time the variation of the special symbol is triggered by the entry, the display mode is changed to one after reduction. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first special symbol can already start fluctuating (at the time of stop display), the medium starting winning opening 26. The display mode does not change even if a game ball enters. Also, if the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memory is 0), the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start changing (at the time of stop display). Even if it is a sphere, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each of the special symbol working memory lamps 34a and 35a is the number of memorized balls at which the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not started yet. Represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes LEDs corresponding to, for example, big hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, a probability variation state display lamp 38d, a time saving state display lamp 38e, and a firing position designation lamp 38f. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol working memory lamp 34a, second special symbol The symbol working memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of the control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress (content) of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Have The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. The main control CPU 72 has a ROM 74, a RAM ( It is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as RWM) 76 is integrated. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number circuit (random number generator) 75, an interrupt controller (interrupt CTR) 192, a parallel I/O port 79, a timer circuit (PTC) 194, and a serial communication circuit (SCU) 196. ing. Of these, the random number circuit 75 is for generating a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big hit determination of the special symbol lottery and the hit determination of the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is It is input to the main control CPU 72. Further, the interrupt controller 192 accepts each interrupt request (XINT interrupt, PTC interrupt, SCU interrupt) from the parallel I/O port 79, the timer circuit 194, and the serial communication circuit 196, and controls these interrupt requests based on the priority order. .. In addition, the main controller 70 monitors a RAM clear switch 71 for initializing the RAM 76 and changing settings, a parallel I/O port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and various states. Peripheral ICs such as a reset controller for generating a reset as required are provided, and these are mounted on the circuit board together with the main control CPU 72. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, etc. are formed as a wiring pattern on the circuit board (or inner layer portion). The I/O port of main controller 70 may be of a serial type.

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting changing device 300, a setting key switch 302, and a RAM clear switch 304. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the setting by operating the setting changing device 300. The setting changing device 300 is a device for switching the setting (at least the setting relating to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery), and operates by operating the RAM clear switch 304 or the like provided in the pachinko machine 1. The setting means a combination of operating probabilities. Furthermore, the operation probability means the probability that a combination of special symbols that will cause the condition device to operate (which means that the big hit game will be executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device for inputting a signal (ON/OFF) indicating the rotating state of the setting key, which is essential for switching the setting. Although various procedures can be adopted as the procedure for changing the setting, for example, the following procedure can be used.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Then, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the key hole for the setting key for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304, the setting key is inserted in the key hole for the setting key and the setting key is inserted. Rotate to the right.
(4) Then, turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

When the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting is changed (setting change state). On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 with the setting key rotated to the right, the setting can be referred to (setting reference state).

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state in which the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of six steps, for example.
The set value can be displayed on, for example, the performance display monitor 200, a dedicated 7-segment segment LED, the game state display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.).

(7) In the case of the slot machine, when the target setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since the pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, the setting key is left) instead of the lever ON process. The process of rotating in the direction, the process of turning on the setting change confirmation button (not shown), etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In this embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the setting change is confirmed, the setting key can be removed from the setting key hole. By this operation, when the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200, the dedicated 7-segment segment LED, and the game state display device 38, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, a normal game is started.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU72 stores the changed set value in the set value buffer of the RAM76. The set value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Outline of setting changes]
The outline of the setting change is as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", the RAM is cleared and the setting is changed (setting change mode).
In the state where the setting is being changed, there is no display on the main display (various lamps included in the game state display device 38), and it is in a state in which it is not possible to shoot a game ball or win a game ball.

In this case, "rn." is displayed on the two left 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) of the performance display monitor 200, and the set value is displayed on the two right 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) such as "-1". It When the RAM clear switch is pressed, the set value changes within the range of 1-6.

Then, when the "setting key is turned off", the setting is confirmed, and the "-" segment is extinguished (it becomes non-display) like "blank (non-display) 1" in the ratio segment display.
In this state, if the inner frame is closed (actually, the closed state lasts for 100 ms), the state of the setting change ends, and once the power is turned off, the state is changed to the normal game state. Transition.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are combined is explained, but a setting change switch may be provided separately from the RAM clear switch 304.

[Overview of setting reference]
The outline of setting reference is as follows.
When the power is turned on in the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "state where the RAM clear switch is not pressed", the setting reference state (setting reference mode) is set.
As in the state of changing the setting, in the state of referring to the setting, there is no display on the main display, and it is in a state in which it is not possible to shoot a game ball or win a game ball.

In this case, "rn." is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side of the performance display monitor, and the set value is "blank (non-display) 1" on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. Is displayed. Further, in the state where the setting is being referred to, the set value does not change even if the RAM clear switch is pressed.

In this state, if the "setting key is OFF" and the "inner frame closed state" (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state of referring to the setting is terminated and once before the power is turned off. After shifting to the state, shift to the normal gaming state.
In this embodiment, the setting reference cannot be performed during the normal game, but the setting reference may be executable during the normal game.

The starting gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting passage of a game ball. Further, in the game board unit 8, a medium start winning opening 26, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30 and a second variable winning device 31 respectively corresponding to a middle starting winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening. The switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85 are provided. Each of the starting winning opening switches 80 and 82 is for detecting the entry of a game ball into the middle starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28a). The first count switch 84 is for detecting the number of game balls entering the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning opening) and counting the number. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the number of game balls entering the second variable winning device 31 (the second special winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 has a first winning opening switch 86 for detecting the entry of the game ball into the normal winning opening 22 and a second winning opening switch for detecting the entry of the game ball into the normal winning opening 24. 81 and is equipped. In addition, about the three normal winning openings 22 on the left side, the configuration using the common winning opening switch 86 is taken as an example, but, for example, three winning opening switches are installed, and the game balls for the respective normal winning openings 22 are provided. The incoming ball may be detected individually.

In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input/output driver (not shown). In the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning opening switch 86, and the second winning opening switch 81 are: The panel relay terminal plate 87 is provided with wiring patterns and connection terminals for relaying the respective winning detection signals transmitted via the panel relay terminal plate 87.

Further, the game board unit 8 is provided with an out switch 99. The game board unit 8 joins the game balls that have passed through the normal winning openings 22, 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first big winning opening 30b, the second big winning opening 31b, and the out opening 32. A merging passage is formed, and an out switch 99 is provided in the merging passage. The out switch 99 detects a game ball passing through the confluence passage, and a detection signal is input to the main control device 70 every time the game ball is detected. Main controller 70 counts the number of out balls based on the detection signal input from out switch 99. Here, since the game spheres fired in the game area 8a always pass through the confluence passage and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, the out switch 99 determines the number of the fired balls fired in the game area 8a, That is, the number of discharges (the number of out balls) discharged from the game area 8a is counted.

The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol working memory lamp 34a, second special symbol working memory lamp 35a and game The display operation of the status display device 38 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals to the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal board 87.

A performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main controller 70 via a panel relay terminal board 87. The display operation of the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the calculation status of the base, and controls the lighting state of the seven segments 201 to 204.
Although the performance display monitor 200 is described as an example in which it is connected to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87, it may be connected to the main control device 70 without the panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 200 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main controller 70.

In addition, the game board unit 8 corresponds to the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, respectively, and is a normal electric auditors solenoid 88, a first big winning opening solenoid 90 and a first big winning opening solenoid 90. Two big winning opening solenoid 97 is provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97 operate (excite) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open/close (operate) the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. Or moving the probability variation region vane member 31d. Control signals are transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the solenoids 88, 90 and 97 by relaying the panel relay terminal plate 87.

In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened independently, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, it generates a door open information signal as an external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the above-described payout device unit 172. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 also includes a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM (RAM) 98 together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured as an integrated LSI. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as an external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

The payout control device 92 can communicate with the main control device 70, and pays out game balls based on the payout command transmitted from the main control device 70.

In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor), and a drive circuit for the payout motor 102 is provided on the payout device substrate 100. There is. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays out the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let out. The paid game balls are sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, the payout passage ball cut switch 104 is installed at the upstream position of the prize ball case, and the payout counting switch 106 is installed at the downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at the upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The payout device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the game balls further paid out are described above. So that it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, the payout ball CPU 94 temporarily suspends the further prize ball operation, and stores the remaining unpaid prize ball number in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the unpaid prize ball remaining number information is not lost. ..

On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the firing control board 108. Further, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The firing control board 108, the firing solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the above-mentioned firing control board set 174. Of these, the firing control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the firing solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among them, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. In addition, the firing solenoid 110 strikes the game ball sent to the firing position and continuously (intermittently) shoots one game ball toward the game area 8a as described above. The game balls are emitted at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (100 or less per minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the body of the player is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle, ball launching device) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. To be done. The drive signal from the firing control board 108 is applied to the ball feeding solenoid 111 via the firing relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118, and when the CR unit is not connected to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120, the launch control board is also the same. The drive circuit of 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a lending/returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display substrate 122 is provided with a display (3 segment 7-segment LED) of the frequency display unit. Further, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 are mounted on the lending/returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal thereof is lent. And it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the lending device connection terminal board 120 for gaming balls and the like. In addition, from the CR unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the lending device connection terminal board 120 for gaming balls and the like. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display substrate 122 drives the display device based on the frequency signal to numerically display the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. In addition, when the valuable medium is not loaded into the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the loaded valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit to display a demo display (the valuable medium). Can also be displayed).

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a production control device 124 (production control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. This effect control device 124 controls the effect associated with the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 also has an effect control CPU 126, which is a central processing unit, on a circuit board (composite sub-control board). The effect control CPU 126 is configured as an LSI that incorporates a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 and eDRAM 131 together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is equipped with various functions necessary for realizing effects in the pachinko machine 1. For example, to control devices such as the VDP 152 for drawing the effect screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the lamps 46 to 52 that produce visual effects, the board lamp 53, the movable body motor 57, and the status LED 58. Driver IC 132, a voice IC 134 for controlling the speakers 54, 55, 56 for outputting voice, and the like. The functional configuration inside the effect control device 124 will be described later in detail with reference to another drawing.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. In the communication harness, depending on the bus width of various performance commands (hereinafter, referred to as “sub-commands” or “performance commands”) transmitted from the main control device 70 to the performance control device 124. The parallel format may be adopted, or the serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of each driver (I/O).

In the present embodiment, the sub connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and drive signals from the driver IC 132 and the audio IC 134 are transmitted via the sub connection board 136 to the various lamps 46 to 52 and the speakers 54, 55,. 56 is applied. In addition, the sub connection board 136 is connected with a production changeover button 45 and a volume control switch (not shown). When the player operates the production changeover button 45 and the volume control switch, those contact signals are transmitted through the sub connection board 136. It is input to the performance control device 124. Further, a jog dial 45a is connected to the sub connection board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the performance control device 124 through the sub connection board 136. Although the example in which the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are connected to the sub connection board 136 is given here, when the saucer electric decorative board is installed, the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are connected to the saucer decorative board. May be.

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 and a status LED 58 are connected to the driver board 138 in addition to the board lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53, the movable body motor 57, and the status LED 58 via the driver board 138.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and this inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a power control unit 162 is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 incorporates a switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V or the like) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC+34V, +12V or the like) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, the electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and the electric power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC+5V) is generated by a power supply IC (three-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

The external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are transferred from the external terminal board 160 to the outside via the payout control device 92. It will be output to. The main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout controller 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are totaled by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the game arcade. Note that, here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but the external information signal may be directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160.

[Internal structure of production control device]
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration inside the effect control device 124.
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a role as an effect control processor that controls effects as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188 required for the effect control device 124 to function as an effect control processor. The control ROM 180 stores a basic program for controlling the effect. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect by accessing the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and executing a program stored in the control ROM 180. The watchdog timer IC 188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the processing is completed within the estimated time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU 126. There is. If the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the watchdog timer of the watchdog timer IC 188 is not input within the predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC 188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for reset activation to the effect control CPU 126. To do. As a result, the effect control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these, the production control device 124 also has an SRAM 182 that is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real-time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time, as functions related to production. A lithium battery 186 for supplying backup power to the SRAM 182 and the RTC 184, peripheral ICs such as an input/output driver (not shown) and a counter/timer circuit are provided. While the power supply control unit 162 supplies drive power to the effect control device 124, the lithium battery 186 stores the power and charges itself. The SRAM 182 and the RTC 184 are connected to the lithium battery 186 and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the supply of drive power from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, the SRAM 182 and the RTC 184 continue to operate until the lithium battery 186 is completely charged (for example, about one and a half months) even when the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off. The stored information can be retained for a while even when the power is off.

Note that the effect control program is configured to store information regarding security, monitoring, defects, etc., which should not be easily erased, in the SRAM 182. Thus, for example, when some trouble occurs in the performance control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is collected (or inspected in the installed state) and the cause of the trouble is investigated by analyzing the information held in the SRAM 182. It becomes possible.

The effect control device 124 is a device that controls the content of the effect related to the game.
The RTC 184 is a device capable of communicating with the effect control device 124 by serial communication or the like and holding the current time information (predetermined information). The RTC 184 is a device that measures the current time and updates the current time information regardless of whether or not the gaming machine is in the power-off state.

By the way, in the control of the effect executed by the effect control CPU 126 according to the program stored in the control ROM 180, as described above, the liquid crystal display 42, the various lamps 46 to 53, the speakers 54, 55 and 56, the status LED 58, and the like are used. Control of production using the device is included. The flow of this effect control can be broadly divided into two stages of "whole control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect according to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the effect control CPU 126 generates instruction data by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and relays between the effect control CPU 126 and each device, the control devices 134, 152, 198, 199. Send to (individual control). As a result, each of the control devices 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and reproduces the performance using each device in the pachinko machine 1 (screen display, sound output, lamp emission, movable body displacement). Etc.) is realized.

In this way, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stage of effect control, and these functions are realized by properly using the resources of the effect control CPU 126. At the stage of overall control, the production control unit 210 in the production control CPU 126 becomes the main subject of operation. Further, in the stage of individual control, the display control unit 220, the sound control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the motor control unit 226, or the sensor control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 is a main body of each operation according to the device to be controlled. Becomes The effect control unit 210 may directly control the control devices 134, 152, 198, 199.

The production control device 124 functions as a production control processor in the stage of overall control, but functions as a production reproduction processor in the stage of individual control. Therefore, the effect control device 124 further includes a circuit board (effect display control board) on which the VDP 152 is mounted, a CGROM (image/sound ROM) 190, and a voice IC 134 for controlling various devices used to reproduce the effect. An LED driver 198, an SMC (serial control controller) 199, and a driver IC 132 are provided.

The CGROM 190 stores drawing materials (moving image data) that form the effect screen and audio materials (audio data) that are output as the effect progresses, in a state compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the voice IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

The VDP 152 is a processor dedicated to drawing an effect image, and is integrated into one chip together with the effect control CPU 126. Further, the VDP 152 has a built-in VRAM 156 which is mainly used when decompressing a drawing material and a drawing material decoder 157 which decompresses (decodes) the compressed drawing material. The VDP 152 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the display control unit 220, reads the necessary drawing material from the CG ROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Then, the read drawing material is decoded by the drawing material decoder 157 to draw an effect image on the VRAM 156, and the effect image is expanded in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). Reproduction of the effect screen is realized by individually driving each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data.

The sound IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sound such as sound effects and BGM that are reproduced during execution of the effect, and is connected to an amplifier (not shown), an external DRAM, and a CG bus. Further, the audio IC 134 has a built-in audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) the compressed audio material. The voice IC 134 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the voice control unit 222, and reads out a necessary voice material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read audio material is decoded on the external DRAM using the audio material decoder 135. By outputting the decoded sound to the glass frame speakers 54 and 55 and the outer frame speaker 56 via the amplifier, stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch sound reproduction (a larger number of channels may be realized) is realized. Further, the voice IC 134 adjusts the output volume of each speaker 54, 55, 56 based on the contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated.

The LED driver 198 controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of the various lamps 46 to 53 and the status LED 58 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In the LED driver 198, the addressing synchronous serial system is adopted. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the lamp control unit 224, and transfers the drive data corresponding to this to the driver IC 132.

The SMC 199 controls the drive pattern of the movable body motor 57 that is a drive source for the movable body 40f for production provided inside the rendering unit 40. The SMC199 uses a clock synchronous serial method. The SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the motor control unit 226, and transfers this to the driver IC 132. Although the SMC 199 is used here only for generating the drive pattern of the motor, the SMC 199 can generate not only the motor but also the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of the lamp. Therefore, the SMC 199 is applied instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the SMC 199 generates data patterns of both the lamp and the motor.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamp and the motor based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 and the SMC 199. The driver IC 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or MOSFET (not shown), and switches (or switches duty) the drive voltage applied to the various lamps 46 to 53, the movable body motor 57, and the status LED 58. Then, by managing the operation, effect reproduction using a lamp or a movable body is realized. Among the various lamps 46 to 53, the board lamp 53 is an LED built in the effect unit 40, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the like. It is equivalent. The status LED 58 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and is a lamp that indicates a status state (for example, a system pre-initialization state, a system post-initialization state, a normal state, etc.) of the effect control device by a lighting pattern. Although the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the sub connection board 136 here, a saucer decorative board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer decorative board is installed in the glass frame decorative lamp 52. It may be configured to be connected to the driver IC 132 via.

In addition to this, the driver IC 132 transfers a contact signal input when the effect switching button 45 or the jog dial 45a is operated to the effect control unit 210 via the sensor control unit 228. The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the effect content to be reproduced, based on the content of the transferred contact signal.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a memory map of a memory area used by the main control CPU 72.
The memory area used by the main control CPU 72 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) assigned to the ROM 74 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) assigned to the RAM 76.

The area (first area) at addresses 0000H to 0BFFH is an area in which the program code (program) of the used area can be stored. The program code of the use area is the first information (for controlling the progress of the game) necessary for executing the game.

The area of the addresses 0000H to 0BFFH (first area) is a part of the program code (first information) of the usage area and the program code (second information) that is not necessary to execute the game. A special program code (special information) is stored.

The area of addresses 0C00H to 0FFFH is an unused area.

The area (first area) at addresses 1000H to 1BFFH is an area in which program data (data) of the used area can be stored. The program data of the use area is the first information necessary for executing the game.
In the area of addresses 1000H to 1BFFH (first area), there is part of the program data (first information) in the used area and the program data (second information) that is not necessary to execute the game. Stores special program data (special information).

The area of addresses 1C00H to 1FFFH is an unused area.

An area (second area) of addresses 2000H to 2FFFH is an area in which the program code and program data outside the area can be stored. The program code/program data outside the area is the second information that is not necessary for executing the game (for example, the processing for performing the test defined by the gaming machine rules and the processing related to the performance display monitor).
In the area (second area) of addresses 2000H to 2FFFH, non-special program code/non-special program data (non-special program data) which is the remaining information of the program code/program data (second information) that is not necessary for execution of the game. Special information) is stored.

The area of addresses 3000H to EFFFH is an unused area.

The area of addresses F000H to F1FFH is used as a work area of a used area and a stack RAM.
The area of addresses F200H to F3FFH is used as a work area and a stack RAM outside the area.
These areas are used as areas temporarily used and stack areas for temporarily saving data when a program in the used area is being executed or a program outside the area is being executed.

The area of addresses F400H to FFFFH is an unused area.

In the memory area of the ROM 74, in addition to the used area and outside the area, an area for storing arbitrary data such as the title and version of the program, and a program for storing information necessary for the main control CPU 72 to execute the program A management area may be provided.

As described above, the ROM 74 and the RAM 76 (storage means) of the present embodiment have a use area (first area) in which the program code and program data (first information) necessary for executing the game can be stored, and the game. It has an area (second area) outside which can store program code/program data (second information) that is not necessary for execution.

Here, the usable area is an area in which the available capacity for controlling the progress of the game is defined by the gaming machine rules, and the outside area is an area not included in the calculation of the available capacity. ..

The main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) is a pachinko machine based on program code/program data (first information) necessary for executing a game and program code/program data (second information) not necessary for executing a game. The machine 1 (gaming machine) is controlled (control means).

In the use area (first area), of the program code/program data (first information) necessary for executing the game and the program code/program data (second information) not necessary for executing the game Partial information, special program code and special program data (special information), is stored.

Outside the area (second area), there is non-special program code/non-special program data (non-special information) which is the remaining information of the program code/program data (second information) that is not necessary for execution of the game. It is stored.

The special program code/special program data (special information) is information that is different for each model among a plurality of models with different game contents, and the non-special program code/non-special program data (non-special information) is the game content. Is information that is common to each model among a plurality of different models.

Therefore, when changing the specifications of the gaming machine, it is necessary to change the special program code/special program data. On the other hand, the non-special program code/non-special program data need not be changed even when the specifications of the gaming machine are changed.

In the special program code/special program data (special information), in the process of calculating the base, the determination process of determining whether or not to calculate the base based on the game state, and the value of the number of prize balls are confirmed. Information about at least one of the confirmation processes is included. Either the determination processing or the confirmation processing may be non-special program code/non-special program data (non-special information).

In the present embodiment, due to the performance of the main control CPU 72, even when the same instruction (program code) is used, the processing speed may be different when used in the used area and when used outside the area. is there. For example, when the LDQ instruction (special load instruction) is used in the usage area, the processing speed becomes faster, but when the LDQ instruction is used outside the area, the processing speed does not become faster. Therefore, the LD instruction (normal load instruction) having a slow processing speed must be used outside the area. The reason for this is that when the LDQ instruction is used outside the area, it is necessary to add saving, resetting, and restoring processing of the stack pointer and the Q register, so that the processing speed becomes rather slow.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing speed is faster when the processing regarding the used area is performed than when the processing regarding the outside area is performed.

The main control CPU 72 uses the program code/program data stored in the use area (first area) to execute (execute) the processing of the use area (first processing) necessary for executing the game. It can be executed (first processing execution means).

Further, the main control CPU72, by using (by executing) the program code program data stored in the outside of the area (second area), processing outside the area (second processing) that is not necessary for execution of the game ) Can be executed (second process execution means).
The above is the configuration example regarding the control of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.
When the setting value is "1", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/319".
When the setting value is "2", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/299".
When the setting value is "3", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/279".
When the setting value is "4", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/259".
If the setting value is "5", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/239".
When the setting value is “6”, the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is “1/199”.

When the set value is "1" to "6", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/32".

In this way, the larger the set value, the greater the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state), and the more advantageous the situation for the player.

In the illustrated example, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery has been described as an example in which the setting difference is provided only in the low probability state, but the setting difference may be provided even in the high probability state. Regarding the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may have a setting difference. Furthermore, setting differences may be provided for other items (for example, the transition rate to the high probability state, the transition rate to the time shortened state, the number of probability changes, the number of time reductions, the number of special variations, etc.).

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the states of the setting keys, and whether the setting can be changed or not.
When the state of the setting key is ON (when rotating to the right, when the input signal from the setting key switch 302 is ON), it is possible to change the setting (including setting reference). It is impossible to pull it out. That is, the setting key cannot be removed while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to.

On the other hand, when the state of the setting key is OFF (when rotating to the left, when the input signal from the setting key switch 302 is OFF), setting change (including setting reference) is impossible, and setting It is possible to remove the key. That is, the setting key can be removed unless the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to.

For setting change and setting reference, if it is possible to shift to the setting change state or setting reference state only by button operation without using the “setting key”, a person who does not have the authority to change the setting (for example, hall staff or malicious intent) There is a risk of leakage of settings, etc., because it is possible for a player who has a problem) to change the settings or refer to the settings.
Therefore, regarding the setting change and the setting reference, the use of the “setting key” is an essential condition.

The state of the "setting key" is two states, ON or OFF. The state of the “setting key” can be confirmed by a signal from the setting key switch 302. The ON state and the OFF state are maintained by operating the “setting key”.

The "setting key" can be inserted and removed only when the state of the "setting key" is OFF. The “setting key” can be inserted into the key hole 306 for the setting key.
The key hole 306 for the setting key exists in the transparent case covering the main control board unit 170 and can be operated without opening the transparent case.

For example, the following conditional branch is included in the program code of the main controller 70.
Include that the setting key is ON in the condition for changing to the setting change or the setting reference.
The condition for shifting to the setting-fixed state during the setting change includes that the setting key is turned from ON to OFF. Alternatively, it simply includes “the setting key is in the OFF state”.
Include that the setting key is OFF in the termination condition during setting change or setting reference.

As a result, without the "setting key", it is not possible to shift to the setting change or the setting reference, and the set value cannot be confirmed. Can be prevented.

Subsequently, a control process executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[CPU initialization (main) process in main controller]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 in the main control device 70 starts the CPU initialization process. The CPU initialization process restores the game state based on the backup information saved at the time of the previous power-off (so-called power restoration), and conversely clears the backup information, thereby resetting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a process for adjusting. Further, the CPU initialization process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for ensuring stable game operation of the pachinko machine 1 after the adjustment of the initial state.

10 and 11 are flowcharts showing a first procedure example of the CPU initialization process. The processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described below step by step.

Step S100: The main control CPU72 first sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU72 sets the interrupt vector table. In this processing, the main control CPU72 sets the address of the interrupt vector table in the I register (interrupt vector register) used for interrupt control. The interrupt vector table defines the priorities required for controlling interrupt requests generated during execution of the CPU initialization process, and the main control CPU 72 sets a plurality of priority orders based on the priority orders defined in the interrupt vector table. Execute interrupt requests in order.

Step S104: The main control CPU72 saves the RAM clear signal (input signal from the RAM clear switch 304). More specifically, the value of the input port to which the RAM clear signal is input is acquired twice consecutively, and the logical sum of these values is saved as the input port value.

Step S106: The main control CPU72 executes a standby process here. This process is a process of waiting for the power supply to be stabilized and a process of waiting for the activation of the effect control device 124. The main control CPU 72 secures a certain waiting time (for example, about several thousand ms, about 3.1 seconds) after the power is turned on, and during that time, a power off notice signal (a signal indicating that the power is being cut off). ) Check. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, it decrements the value of the loop counter and bit-checks the input port of the power-off notice signal. The power-off notice signal is input by the IC that monitors the voltage level of the drive voltage. When the input of the power-off notice signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. This makes it possible to protect the system when, for example, turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S108: Next, the main control CPU72 permits access to the work area of the RAM76. Specifically, the RAM protection setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S109: The main control CPU72 confirms whether the inner frame is opened and the setting key is ON. The opening of the inner frame can be confirmed by a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93. The opening of the inner frame may be confirmed by a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 or another inner frame opening switch (not shown). Further, whether or not the setting key is ON can be confirmed by an input signal from the setting key switch 302.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the inner frame is open and the setting key is ON (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S110. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the inner frame is open and the setting key is ON (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S113 (in-page connector 1→1).

Step S110: The main control CPU72 refers to the RAM clear signal by checking the specific bit of the input port value saved in the previous step S104, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S112. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S111a.

Step S111a: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the setting change flag is "00H".

The setting change flag is stored in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76, "00H" indicates that a normal game is being performed, "01H" indicates that the setting is being changed/before confirmation, and "02H". Indicates that the setting is being changed/determined, and “03H” indicates that the setting is being referred to.

The set value buffer also stores the set value, and the set value buffer is not cleared even when the RAM clear is started. The reason for this is that "the setting change is continued even if the power is turned off during the setting change and the RAM clear is activated" and "the setting change flag is changed when the setting reference condition is satisfied. Also because it does not affect the checksum value.”

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the setting change flag is “00H” (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S111b. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the setting change flag is “00H” (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S114 (in-page connector 2→2).

Step S111b: The main control CPU72 executes a process of setting "03H" to the setting change flag. Next, the main control CPU72 executes step S114 (in-page connector 2→2).

Step S112: The main control CPU72 executes the process of setting "01H" to the setting change flag. Next, the main control CPU72 executes step S120 (in-page connector 3→3).

Step S113: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S120 (in-page connector 3→3). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S114.

Step S114: The main control CPU72 executes a process of confirming whether the backup flag and the checksum are normal.

Regarding the backup flag, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the backup flag is set (whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM76). If the backup is normally completed by the process executed at the previous power-off and the backup flag is set to a specific value (for example, "01H"), it is determined that the backup flag is normal. The backup flag is set to a specific value when a normal backup process is executed.

Regarding the checksum, the main control CPU72 executes the checksum on the backup information in the RAM76. Specifically, the main control CPU72 checksums all the work areas of the RAM76 except the backup flag and the checksum buffer. If the checksum result is normal, the main control CPU72 determines that the checksum is normal.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the backup flag and the checksum are normal (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S116. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the backup flag and the checksum are normal (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S120.

Step S116: The main control CPU72 executes an initialization process when the power is restored. Specifically, the main control CPU72 clears the stored contents of a partial area of the RAM76. The partial area of the RAM 76 is a memory area to be cleared when the power is restored.

Step S117: The main control CPU72 executes a backup restoration process. The main control CPU 72 restores the saved valid backup information. As a result, the main control CPU 72 can restore the state when the power was cut off.

Step S118: The main control CPU72, the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 when the power is restored (for example, a power restoration specification command indicating that the power is shut down and activated) and the payout command (to the payout controller 92). Command to be sent). When this processing ends, the main control CPU72 next executes step S125.

Step S120: The main control CPU72 executes initialization processing (RAM clear processing) when RAM is cleared. Specifically, the main control CPU72 clears the stored contents of the used area of the RAM76 to be cleared when the RAM is cleared. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, its contents are erased. The storage contents outside the area of the RAM 76 may or may not be cleared. The value of the setting change flag may be cleared or may not be cleared. If the value of the setting change flag is cleared, the determination of step S131a described below will always be negative (No). Therefore, when the determination of step S131a described below is performed based on the state before RAM clear, the setting change It is preferable not to clear the value of the medium flag. Further, the main control CPU72 initializes the RAM76.

Step S124: The main control CPU 71 sets a command (for example, a RAM clear designation command indicating that RAM clear has started) and a payout command (a command for the payout control device 92) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 when the RAM is cleared. ..

Step S125: The main control CPU 71 executes a common initialization process when the RAM is cleared and the power is restored.

Step S126: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a payout control output process. In this processing, the main control CPU72 outputs the payout command (power supply restoration designation command) set in step S118 or the payout command (RAM clear designation command) set in step S124 to the payout command buffer.

Step S128: The main control CPU72 executes a subcommand output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first outputs the effect command (power supply restoration designation command) set in step S118 or the effect command (RAM clear designation command) set in step S124 to the sub command transmission buffer. Further, the main control CPU72, other various production commands required for production control (for example, model designation command, state designation command, special drawing destination determination production command, production memory number increase production command, production storage number decrease production. Command, number-of-times counter value command, normal game management phase command, special game management phase command, launch position designation command, etc.) and outputs them to the sub command transmission buffer. At this time, the main control CPU72 can also set different values for these effect commands when the power is restored and when the RAM is cleared.

For example, when the power is restored, the value of each effect command is set based on the backup information. These effect commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subsequent subcommand transmission process (step S144), so that the effect control device 124 causes the effect state that was being executed at the previous power-off time (for example, The internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the sound output content, the light emission state of various lamps, etc.) can be restored.

Step S130: The main control CPU72 executes an input port process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 acquires the contents of each input port, and stores the result of performing a predetermined calculation on the value in the state flag of each input port. Upon completion of this process, the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S131 (outside page connector A→A).

Step S131: The main control CPU72 executes a process of resetting the main command permission signal (communication permission signal). The main command permission signal is a signal that can be independently set by the main control CPU 72 (main control device 70) and the payout control CPU 94 (payout control device 92).
The main controller 70 and the payout controller 92 are connected by two lines. The first line is a signal line and the second line is a command line.

For example, when the main control CPU 72 sets the main command permission signal, the payout control CPU 94 can transmit the command. On the other hand, when the payout control CPU 94 sets the main command permission signal, the main control CPU 72 can transmit the command.

Here, since the main control CPU72 is performing the process of resetting the main command permission signal, the payout control CPU94 is in a state in which it is not possible to transmit the command.

If the payout command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side is not reset, the main control device 70 can send a command. However, since the payout command (prize ball command) is not generated during the setting change or the setting reference, the payout control device 92 does not pay out the game ball. When the payout control device 92 can set the main command permission signal, the payout command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side may be the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side.

Here, when the main command permission signal on the main controller 70 side is reset, the payout controller 92 causes a communication error. In order to avoid a communication error, a method of communicating with the payout control device 92 and transmitting a command indicating that the setting is being changed may be adopted.

An advantage of adopting a system in which the main command permission signal on the main control device 70 side is not set and the communication with the payout control device 92 is not performed is that the software of the payout control device 92 does not need to be changed.
By resetting the launch permission signal, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being launched.

In the present embodiment, the main command permission signal is described as a signal that can be independently set by the main control CPU 72 (main control device 70) and the payout control CPU 94 (payout control device 92). The command permission signal can be set only by the main control device 70 and cannot be set by the payout control device 92. In this case, the payout control device 92 uses a payout command permission signal (communication permission signal) instead of the main command permission signal. Then, when the payout control device 92 sets the payout command permission signal, the main control device 70 becomes ready to send a command to the payout control device 92, and the payout control device 92 resets the payout command permission signal. As a result, the main control device 70 becomes in a state in which it is impossible to send a command to the payout control device 92.

Step S131a: The main control CPU72 confirms whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H” or “03H”.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S132 without executing step S131b. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S131b.

Step S131b: The main control CPU72 executes the process of setting the main command permission signal to the specific bit of the output port. As a result, the payout control device 92 enters a state in which it can send a command to the main control device 70. As a result, the game balls can be paid out unless the setting is being changed or the setting is not being referred to.

By executing such processing, the main control CPU72 sets a predetermined prohibited state during setting change or setting reference (during execution of setting-related processing), so that the payout control device 92 can play the game ball. It is possible to execute prohibition processing that does not allow payout (prohibition processing execution means).

The payout control device 92 transmits a payout start command (start command) to the main control device 70, and receives a start confirmation command for the payout start command to enter the payout enable state. In the payout enable state, the main control device 70 The game ball is paid out based on the payout command transmitted.

Further, by executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 sets a predetermined prohibition state to prohibit the payout activation command from being sent from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70. It is possible to prohibit the payout control device 92 from being in the payable state, and to prevent the payout control device 92 from paying out game balls (prohibition process executing means).

Further, by executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 sets the main command permission signal (communication permission signal) on the main control device 70 side to OFF (communication not permitted), whereby a predetermined prohibited state ( The state in which the main command permission signal on the main control device 70 side is OFF can be set (prohibition process execution means).

Step S132: The main control CPU72 resets (OFF) the specific bit of the output port to clear the firing permission signal. The launch permission signal is included in the backup target when the power is cut off. Therefore, when the main controller 70 (pachinko machine 1) returns to power, the launch permission signal is also returned to the state at the time of power shutdown.

The firing permission signal is set in a specific bit (for example, bit 0) of the specific output port buffer (for example, the buffer for the output port 3) stored in the RAM 76.

Step S133: The main control CPU72 sets a timer interrupt cycle. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined timer interrupt period (for example, 4 ms) in the counter setting register of the timer circuit 194.

Step S134: The main control CPU72 resets the interrupt daisy chain. Specifically, the main control CPU72 executes the RETI instruction after backing up the start address of the main loop processing described later as a preliminary preparation for the interrupt processing. By performing this processing, it becomes possible to normally start the interrupt processing that occurs thereafter and to continue the processing from the main loop processing after the execution of the interrupt processing.

When the above procedure is executed in the CPU initialization process, the main control CPU72 starts execution of the main loop process of step S135. As long as the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is maintained, the main control CPU72 repeatedly executes the main loop processing.

When a setting function (setting changing device 300) is added to the pachinko machine 1, the number of states when the power is turned on increases. At this time, depending on some operations, the state when the power is turned on is “normal recovery (power recovery)”, “RAM clear recovery (initialization)”, “setting reference mode (setting reference)”, and “setting change mode ( Change settings)”.

In this embodiment, since the state when the power is turned on is divided into four, the shift determination is performed using two input devices such as the setting key switch 302 and the RAM clear switch 304.

The transition conditions to the four states are as follows.
(1) Normal recovery RAM clear switch: OFF
Setting key switch: OFF
(2) RAM clear recovery RAM clear switch: ON
Setting key switch: OFF
(3) Setting reference mode RAM clear switch: OFF
Setting key switch: ON
(4) Setting change mode RAM clear switch: ON
Setting key switch: ON

Thus, the four states can be divided by operating the setting key switch 302 and the RAM clear switch 304.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing command transmission timing in the first procedure example of the CPU initialization processing.

[Main controller]
When the power is turned on, main controller 70 waits for [A01] 3.1 seconds, and determines [A02] starting method.

Depending on the determination of the activation method, the main controller 70 is activated by [A03] initialization (RAM clear), [A04] power recovery (recovery of backup information), or [A05] setting change. Alternatively, it is started by referring to [A06] setting.

When the processing of [A03] initialization, [A04] power recovery, [A05] setting change or [A06] setting reference is completed, the main control device 70 sets the [A07] main command permission signal to ON, [A08] Shift to normal game. After the main command permission signal is set to ON, the command from the payout control device 92 can be received.

[Payout control device]
When the power is turned on, the payout control device 92 waits for [B01] 0.1 second, and executes [B02] power-on processing. In the power-on process, the payout control device 92 can set the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side to ON.

Next, the payout control device 92 sets the [B03] payout command permission signal to ON, and shifts to the [B04] activation command transmission waiting state. The activation command transmission waiting state is a state in which the main control device 70 is waiting for the main command permission signal to be set to ON, and a command cannot be transmitted to the main control device 70 ( Command cannot be transmitted to main controller 70).

Then, in the main control device 70, when the main command permission signal is set to ON ([A07]), the payout control device 92 becomes a state in which a command can be transmitted to the main control device 70 (main control (A state in which a command can be transmitted to the device 70), the [C01] payout control device 92 transmits a payout activation command to the main control device 70.

Receiving the payout activation command, main controller 70 transmits a [C02] activation confirmation command to payout controller 92 as a command in response to the command.
As a result, the payout control device 92 shifts to the [B05] normal game state, and the game balls can be paid out.

Since the game can be stopped while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to, it is desired to prohibit the command transmission from the payout control device 92.

In order to prohibit command transmission from the payout control device 92 during setting change or setting reference, the following method is adopted in the first procedure example of the CPU initialization processing. The commands transmitted from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70 are classified as follows.

(1) Payout start command (confirmation of payout operation permission)
(2) Error-related commands (errors related to payout (full tank error, failure error, etc. are reported by the production control device))

The operation of main controller 70 at the time of receiving each command is as follows.
(3) After receiving the command of (1), the main control device 70 returns a payout operation permission command (start confirmation command) to the payout control device 92.
(4) After receiving the command in (2) above, an error command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Here, although there is no problem in executing the above (4), there is a possibility that the payout operation will be performed during the setting change or the setting reference in the above (3).
Therefore, in order to not perform the above (3), a method of using the "main command permission signal" and not transmitting a command is adopted.

The method of using the main command enable signal is as follows.
The payout control device 92 confirms the “main command permission signal” on the main control device 70 side before transmitting the command. The “main command permission signal” on the main controller 70 side is a signal indicating a command receivable state of the main controller 70.
In the present embodiment, while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to, the "main command permission signal" is set to the off state on the main control device 70 side, so that the payout control device 92 does not transmit the command.

In the main control device 70, the payout cannot be performed only by setting the main command permission signal to OFF, and the payout control device 92 side does not require software modification. Further, the main controller 70 side can be designed without considering the command reception during the setting change or the setting reference.

13 and 14 are flowcharts showing the second procedure example of the CPU initialization process.
The difference between the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process and the second procedure example of the CPU initialization process is that steps S131 to S131b in FIG. 11 are changed to steps S181 to S181b in FIG. is there. The out-of-page connector is also changed to B.
Therefore, in the following description, step S181 to step S181b in FIG. 14 will be described, and description of other points will be omitted.

Step S181: The main control CPU72 executes the process of setting the main command permission signal (communication permission signal) to the specific bit of the output port. As a result, the payout control device 92 enters a state in which it can send a command to the main control device 70.

Step S181a: The main control CPU72 confirms whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H” or “03H”.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S181b. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S132.

Step S181b: The main control CPU72 executes the process of setting the payout operation stop command. When the payout control device 92 receives the payout operation stop command, the payout control device 92 enters a state in which the game balls cannot be paid out. In this case, the payout control device 92 may shift to a state in which a command cannot be transmitted to the main control device 70.

The payout operation stop command is transmitted in the timer interrupt processing after shifting to the main loop processing.
While changing the setting or changing the setting, the timer interrupt processing is executed, but a processing route different from the normal game is executed. This point is the same in the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process.
The payout operation start command can be set in the power-restoring initialization processing (CPU initialization processing) when the power is restored, or in the RAM clearing initialization processing (CPU initialization processing).
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU72 executes step S132.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU72, during the setting change or setting reference (during the execution of the setting-related processing), the payout operation stop command for prohibiting the payout control device 92 from paying out game balls. By transmitting the (prohibition command), it is possible to execute a prohibition process in which the payout control device 92 is not caused to pay out the game balls (prohibition process execution means).

The payout control device 92 transmits a payout start command (start command) to the main control device 70 and receives a start confirmation command for the payout start command to shift from the payout impossible state to the payout possible state and the payout possible state. At, the game ball is paid out based on the payout command transmitted from the main control device 70.

Further, by executing such a process, the main control CPU72 shifts the payout control device 92 to the payout impossible state by transmitting a payout operation stop command (prohibition command) to the payout control device 92, It is possible to prevent the payout control device 92 from paying out game balls (prohibition process executing means).

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing command transmission timing of the second procedure example of the CPU initialization processing.
The dotted line in the figure indicates the time when the timer interrupt is possible.

[Main controller]
When the power is turned on, main controller 70 waits for [D01] 3.1 seconds and determines [D02] starting method.

Depending on the determination of the activation method, the main control device 70 is activated by [D03] initialization (RAM clear) or [D04] power recovery (recovery of backup information) to activate [D05] main command permission. Set the signal to ON. After the main command permission signal is set to ON, the command from the payout control device 92 can be received.
Further, depending on the determination of the activation method, the main control device 70 is activated by changing the setting of [D06] or is activated by referring to the setting of [D07].

When the processing of [D03] initialization, [D04] power recovery, [D06] setting change or [D07] setting reference is completed, the main controller 70 shifts to [D08] normal game.

[D08] In the normal game, the main control device 70 is in a state in which it is possible to execute the timer interrupt process, and in the timer interrupt process, [D09] setting change, [D10] setting reference or [D11] normal game related process is performed. To be executed.

[Payout control device]
When the power is turned on, the payout control device 92 waits for [E01] for 0.1 seconds, and executes [E02] power-on processing. In the power-on process, the payout control device 92 can set the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side to ON.

Next, the payout control device 92 sets the [E03] payout command permission signal to ON, and shifts to the [E04] activation command transmission waiting state. The activation command transmission waiting state is a state in which the main control device 70 waits for the main command permission signal to be set to ON, and a command cannot be transmitted to the main control device 70 ( Command cannot be transmitted to main controller 70).

[F01] The main control device 70 confirms the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side, and when the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side is set to ON, instructs the payout control device 92 to Send the start command.

Then, in the main control device 70, when the main command permission signal is set to ON ([D05]), the payout control device 92 becomes ready to send a command to the main control device 70 (main control (State in which command can be transmitted to the device 70), [F02] The payout control device 92 transmits a payout activation command to the main control device 70. It should be noted that the transmission of the activation command of [F01] and the transmission of the withdrawal activation command of [F02] may be reversed in order.

Receiving the payout activation command, main controller 70 transmits a [F03] activation confirmation command to payout controller 92 as a command in response to the command. As a result, the payout control device 92 is in a state in which the game balls can be paid out.

[F04] When the main control device 70 is activated by setting change or setting reference ([D06] or [D07]), the main control device 70 transmits a payout operation stop command to the payout control device 92. Thereby, the payout control device 92 is in a state in which the payout of the game balls is impossible.

[F05] The main control device 70 sends a payout operation start command to the payout control device 92 when the process related to the setting change or the setting reference is completed. As a result, the payout control device 92 is in a state in which the game balls can be paid out.
Then, the payout control device 92 shifts to the [E05] normal game state.

[E05] In the normal game, the payout control device 92 is ready to execute the timer interrupt process, and in the timer interrupt process, [E06] waiting for payout permission or [E07] process related to the normal game is executed.

[G01] In the payout control device 92, the payout operation is disabled for 5 seconds after the activation confirmation command is received. Therefore, by receiving the payout operation stop command during that time, the payout of the payout control device 92 is prohibited. In other words, for a moment, the payout is permitted, but since there is a wait of 5 seconds, the game balls are not paid out during this period. Since the payout operation stop command is transmitted before the wait for 5 seconds is completed, the game balls are not paid out. Then, in this state, setting change or setting reference is executed. Regarding the payout operation start command, a weight of 2 seconds is set after the reception.

In this way, the payout control device 92 shifts from the unpaidable state to the payable state after a lapse of a certain time (after 5 seconds has elapsed and after the time of G01 has elapsed) after receiving the activation confirmation command.
Then, the main control device 70 transmits a payout operation stop command (prohibition command) before a fixed time has elapsed (5 seconds has elapsed, before G01 has elapsed time) since the activation confirmation command was transmitted, and the payout control device 92 Restricts the shift from the payout impossible state to the payout possible state (prohibition process executing means).

Since the game can be stopped while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to, it is desired to prohibit the payout operation of the payout control device 92.

In order to prohibit the payout operation of the payout control device 92 during the setting change or the setting reference, the following method is adopted in the second procedure example of the CPU initialization processing. The commands transmitted from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70 are classified as follows.

(1) Payout start command (confirmation of payout operation permission)
(2) Error-related command (reporting the error related to payout by the production control device)

The operation of main controller 70 at the time of receiving each command is as follows.
(3) After receiving the command of (1), the main control device 70 returns a payout operation permission command (start confirmation command) to the payout control device 92.
(4) After receiving the command of (1) above, an error command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Here, although there is no problem in executing the above (4), there is a possibility that the payout operation will be performed during the setting change or the setting reference in the above (3).
Therefore, before the game balls are actually paid out after the activation confirmation command of (3) is transmitted, a "setting change/reference start command" is transmitted to the payout control device 92, and the payout control device 92 sends the game balls. Adopt a method to prevent paying out.

The operation on the payout control device 92 side after receiving the setting change/reference start command is as follows.
The payout control device 92 that has received the setting change/reference start command sets the payout stop state. The release stop state is triggered by the setting change/reference end command.

Here, "setting change/reference start command" and "setting change/reference end command" may be prepared as new commands, but "payout operation start command" and "payout operation stop command" may also be used. it can.
In this case, “setting change/reference start command”=“payout operation stop command” and “setting change/reference end command”=“payout operation start command”.

As a result, unintended payout can be prevented during setting change or setting reference, and by using the “payout operation start command” or the “payout operation stop command”, the software correction of the payout control device 92 becomes unnecessary. ..

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the main loop processing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.
In the main loop processing, while updating the random numbers (stirring the random numbers, etc.), the following three types of interrupts are waited for.
(1) Serial communication reception interrupt (when receiving command from payout controller)
(2) Timer interrupt (when timer expires once every 4 ms)
(3) Power interruption warning (when input voltage drops due to power interruption)
Most of the processing related to the game is executed by the timer interrupt processing.

Step S141: The main control CPU72 executes an interrupt prohibition process.
Step S142: The main control CPU72 executes an initial value random number updating process. In this process, the main control CPU72 increments the random number for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers except the big hit determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to a normal symbol (for example, a big hit symbol random number for determining the type of winning, reach determination Random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) are generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another timer interrupt process (step S205 in FIG. 22), but the initial value of the loop counter (all Random numbers do not have to be the target) have been changed.

The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S142, the initial value updating random number is updated. In this process, the initial value of the big hit symbol random number is updated. The reason why step S142 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in step S141 is that the same process is executed in another timer interrupt process (step S205 in FIG. 22), and therefore, duplication (conflict) with this is prevented. This is because. The big hit determination random number and the big hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number circuit 75, and the update cycle thereof is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (eg, several ms) (eg, several μs). It is not necessary to update the initial values of the decision random number and the hit decision random number.

Step S143: The main control CPU72 executes a main command analysis process. In this process, if there is a command from the payout control device 92 stored by the serial communication reception interrupt, the data received from the payout control device 92 is analyzed and the process according to the result is performed. Specifically, the main control CPU72 outputs the payout activation confirmation designation command to the payout command buffer when the received main command is the payout activation designation command, while the main control CPU72 judges that the received main command is After checking whether the value is within the specified range (whether it is a proper value for the main command), if it is out of the range, a payout error specification command is output to the subcommand transmission buffer, and the payout radio wave is output depending on the situation. Set the error flag.

Step S144: The main control CPU72 executes a subcommand transmission process. In this process, when an untransmitted subcommand (effect command) remains in the subcommand transmission buffer, the main control CPU72 instructs the effect control device 124 to store the subcommand stored in the subcommand transmission buffer. To send.

Step S145: The main control CPU72 executes performance display monitor total division processing. This processing is processing outside the area. In this process, the main control CPU72 executes a process of calculating the base displayed on the performance display monitor 200. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 uses the division task to determine the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls enter each prize hole (start prize hole, normal prize hole, large prize hole). The base is calculated by dividing by the number of outs (the number of game balls detected by the out switch) indicating the number of game balls shot in the area (base calculation means). The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S146, Step S147: The main control CPU72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated in this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that do not relate to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers.

Then, a series of these processes is performed in the remaining time when an interrupt request is generated during execution of the main loop process and the main control CPU 72 executes various interrupt processes.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the contents of processing executed when a serial communication reception interrupt occurs.
When the serial communication reception interrupt occurs, the main control CPU72 executes the serial communication reception interrupt processing (step S136). The serial communication reception interrupt is generated when a command is received from the payout control device 92.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the contents of processing executed when a timer interrupt occurs.
When the timer interrupt occurs, the main control CPU72 executes a timer interrupt process (step S137). The timer interrupt occurs when the timer time is up once in the timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms).

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the contents of the processing executed when an interruption at the time of power cutoff notice occurs.
When the power-off notice interrupt is generated, the main control CPU72 executes a power-off notice interrupt process (step S138). The power interruption warning interrupt is generated when the input voltage drops due to the power interruption.

The priority levels of interrupts are "high" for "serial communication reception interrupt", "medium" for "timer interrupt", and "low" for "interruption at power-off notice".
Therefore, if a "serial communication receive interrupt" occurs while the "timer interrupt" is occurring and the "timer interrupt process" is being executed, the "serial communication receive interrupt process" will be executed unless the interrupt is disabled. To execute.
On the other hand, even if a "power interruption warning interrupt" occurs while a "timer interruption" occurs and "timer interruption processing" is being executed, the "power interruption warning interruption processing" is executed at that time. Instead, the "timer interruption notice interrupt processing" is executed after the "timer interruption processing" is completed.

When various interrupt processes such as serial communication receive interrupt process (main command receive interrupt process) and timer interrupt process are completed, the process returns to the interrupt source (the program address designated by the stack pointer).
Since interrupt processing at power off notice is a special process, it cannot be returned to the interrupt source in principle. Usually, after performing save processing (calculation of checksum, RWM (RAM) access protection, etc.), reset occurrence due to voltage drop is waited on the spot. When the power supply is restored midway, the process returns to the beginning of the program (for example, CPU initialization process). It should be noted that the interrupt may be returned to the interrupt source at the beginning of the process, but this is an exceptional process.

[Serial communication reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of serial communication reception interrupt processing.
The serial communication reception interrupt process is executed when a command is received from the payout control device 92. The payout control device 92 transmits to the main control device 70 a command for designating a payout activation indicating that the payout control device 92 has been activated, and various devices related to payout of prize balls as the game progresses (for example, the payout device substrate 100 and A command (error command or the like) transmitted from main tank switch 161 to main controller 70 is relayed. These commands transmitted by the payout controller 92 are received by the reception data register of the specific channel of the serial communication circuit 196 of the main controller 70. The main control CPU72 executes the serial communication reception interrupt process (SCU interrupt process) triggered by this command reception (SCU interrupt). Hereinafter, each procedure of serial communication reception interrupt processing will be described.

Step S180: First, the main control CPU72 saves the values of the A register (accumulator) and the F register (flag register) used during the execution of the main loop processing to the save area of the RAM 76. After saving the value, another value can be written in each register during execution of the data reception interrupt process.

Step S182: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not there is a reception error. Specifically, the main control CPU72 checks a specific bit of the status register to check whether or not there is data in the reception data register (reception FIFO), and if there is data, whether or not it is normal data. Check if Then, when there is no data, or when there is data but not normal data, the main control CPU72 determines that there is a reception error.

When it is determined that there is a reception error (Yes), the main control CPU72 does not execute step S184. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reception error has not occurred (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S184.

Step S184: The main control CPU72 executes a process of storing the received command (main command) in the buffer (received command buffer). The saved main command is analyzed by the main command analysis process of the main loop process.

This process is a process of rewriting the buffer in the used area of the RAM 76. For this reason, if a serial communication reception interrupt occurs during the process related to outside the area, the buffer in the used area will be rewritten even though the process related to the area outside is being executed. May violate gaming machine rules.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the serial communication reception interrupt process is executed, the interrupt is prohibited (the serial communication reception interrupt is prohibited), and then the serial communication reception interrupt process is executed.

Steps S186 and S188: The main control CPU72 restores the values of the A and F registers saved in step S180 to the respective registers, permits the interrupt, and then terminates the serial communication reception interrupt process and executes the main loop process (FIG. 16). ) Return to the interrupt source.

[Interrupt processing at power off notice]
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of interrupt processing at the time of power off notice.
The power interruption notice interrupt process is executed when a power interruption (hereinafter, abbreviated as "power interruption") occurs.
In the main controller 70, the occurrence of power interruption and the occurrence of reset are monitored by the same monitoring IC (for example, IC mounted in a reset controller (not shown)). The monitoring IC monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162, and outputs a power-off notice signal to the XINT terminal of the parallel I/O port 79 when the voltage level falls below the reference voltage. The main control CPU72 executes the power interruption notice interrupt processing (XINT interruption processing) triggered by the input of the power interruption notice signal to the XINT terminal (XINT interrupt).

Steps S151, S152: The main control CPU72 reads the power-off detection switch input port of the parallel I/O port 79, checks a specific bit, and confirms whether or not the power-off notice signal is detected. When it cannot be confirmed that the power-off notice signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU72 ends the power-off notice interrupt process and returns to the interrupt source of the main loop process (FIG. 16). On the other hand, when confirming that the power-off notice signal is detected (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes the following step S153.

Step S153: The main control CPU72 executes processing to clear all output ports. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output ports corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, and the second special winning opening solenoid 97. Clear the output port buffer.

The process of step S153 is a process executed when it is determined to be affirmative (Yes) in step S152 or when the setting change is completed (by execution of step S330 in FIG. 27).

Step S154: The main control CPU72 executes a process of calculating the checksum and storing it. Specifically, the main control CPU72 adds the entire contents of the backup target area of the RAM76 excluding the backup flag and the checksum buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for all the areas. Then, when the sum calculation is completed for all the areas, the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the checksum buffer.

Step S155: The main control CPU72 stores a valid value (for example, "01") in the backup flag area.

Step S156: The main control CPU72 executes a RAM (RWM) access prohibition process. Specifically, the main control CPU72 stores "00H" indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the used area and outside the area) of the RAM76.

Step S157: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the power-off notice signal is detected. The method of confirming the power-off notice signal is the same as the method in step S152 described above.
When confirming that the power-off notice signal is detected (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S157 again. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the power-off notice signal is detected (No), the main control CPU72 executes the following step S158.

Step S158: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms) has elapsed in a state where the power-off warning signal is not detected (OFF state). When it is confirmed that the predetermined time has passed without detecting the power-off warning signal (Yes), the main control CPU72 returns to the beginning of the program. Since the program relating to the CPU initialization processing is arranged at the beginning of the program, returning to the beginning of the program means executing the CPU initialization processing. On the other hand, if the main control CPU72 cannot confirm that the predetermined time has passed without detecting the power-off notice signal (No), the main control CPU72 returns to step S157 and repeats the processing up to this point. By executing such processing, when the power supply is restored (the power-off warning signal is turned off for 10 ms continuously), the program can be returned to the beginning of the power-off warning interrupt processing program.

Further, the processing of steps S157 and S158 is a standby processing executed in preparation for shutting off the power supply from the power supply control unit 162. If the power-off warning signal is continuously detected, steps S157 and S158 are repeatedly executed, so that the standby state is continued as long as the power supply is continued. As described above, the main control CPU 72 first calculates the checksum and saves the result before the power supply is completely cut off, and enters a standby state. The standby state is maintained without executing any processing, and the power supply is shut down in a safe state (there is a state of waiting for reset due to a voltage drop).

When the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the power supply source to the main control device 70 is automatically switched to the backup power supply. After power failure, the main controller 70 is supplied with backup power from a backup power supply circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted in the main controller 70). The contents of the memory are retained without loss even after the power is turned off. The backup power supply circuit may be built in the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum addition target) is retained as storage in the RAM 76 even after the power is turned off. Also, the retained storage is restored as backup information at the time of power failure after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous CPU initialization processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of timer interrupt processing.
The main control CPU72 executes a timer interrupt process (PTC interrupt process) every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on an interrupt request (PTC interrupt) output from the timer circuit 194. Hereinafter, each procedure of the timer interrupt processing will be described.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU72 stores the values of the AF register (a pair of accumulator and flag register) and the BC, DE, and HL registers (a pair of general-purpose registers) used during the execution of the main loop processing in the save area of the RAM Evacuate to. After saving the value, another value can be written to each register during execution of the timer interrupt process.

Step S201: The main control CPU72 executes an interrupt flag initialization process. In this processing, processing for clearing (=0) the timer interrupt flag is executed. The reason for clearing the timer interrupt flag is that the timer interrupt occurs in a predetermined timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms), but the timer interrupt flag is set (=1) in the predetermined timer interrupt cycle. In addition, when the timer interrupt flag is set, generation of a timer interrupt is not permitted.

Step S201a: The main control CPU72 executes an interrupt permission process. By permitting the interrupt here, another interrupt can be generated while the next step and subsequent steps of the timer interrupt process are being executed.

Step S202: The main control CPU72 executes a dynamic port output process. In this process, in order to control the lighting of each lamp mounted on the integrated display substrate 89 and the performance display monitor 200 by the dynamic lighting method, port output is performed in common units. Specifically, the main control CPU72, after clearing the output port, outputs the generated common output data to the common port output buffer corresponding to the selected common. The output contents are the contents set by the previous timer interrupt.

Here, the data output to the port output buffer for each common is sequentially port output one common at a time in this dynamic port output processing every time the timer interrupt processing occurs. For example, the data stored for common 1 is output to the port in the next timer interrupt processing, the data stored for common 2 is output to the port in the next timer interrupt processing, and so on. The data stored in the port output buffer for each common is processed one by one. As a result, each lamp constituting a predetermined display mode (variable display of symbols, stop display, operation memory number display, game state display, etc.) and performance display monitor is driven in sequence in common unit, and dynamic lighting system The lighting is controlled by.

Step S203: The main control CPU72 executes a port input process. In this process, in order to accurately obtain the latest switch state based on the input port information, the main control CPU 72 causes the parallel I/O port 79 to logically input the values of various switch signals and the inversion result value of the previous input value. The product is stored in the input port on detection flag. As a result, the value of the input port ON detection flag (ON/OFF) makes it possible to grasp an accurate input state in consideration of changes in various switch signals from the previous time. The various switch signals include a passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, a middle start winning opening switch 80, a right starting winning opening switch 82, a first count switch 84, a second count switch 85, a first winning opening switch 86, a 2 includes a winning detection signal from the winning opening switch 81, a detection signal from a fraudulent detection switch (a magnetic detection switch, a radio wave detection switch, a vibration detection switch, etc.) not shown.

Step S204: The main control CPU72 executes a timer updating process. In this process, the main control CPU72, in addition to various timers used in the game (timers for managing the variable time/stop time of the symbols and the open/close times of the electric auditors), various timers for external information, security signals A process (subtraction process, etc.) for updating a counter such as a timer is executed.

Step S205: The main control CPU72 executes an initial value random number updating process. The content of the process is the same as the initial value random number updating process (step S142 in FIG. 16) of the main loop process.

Step S206: The main control CPU72 executes a winning symbol random number updating process. In this processing, the main control CPU72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery of special symbols and normal symbols. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and each loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, a big hit symbol random number and the like.

Step S206a: The main control CPU72 confirms whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H” or “03H”.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S206b. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S207.

The reason for executing such a determination process is to prevent the process related to the normal game from being executed when the setting is being changed and the setting is being referred to. Then, during the setting change or the setting reference, by not executing the processing related to the normal game in the timer interrupt processing, it is possible to reduce the load of the program of the main control device 70.

Step S206b: The main control CPU72 executes a setting change process. By executing this processing, the main control CPU72 executes the setting-related processing including at least one of the setting change processing executed when changing the setting and the setting reference processing executed when referring to the setting. It is possible (setting related process execution means). The details of the processing will be described later. The setting-related processing includes processing that is executed during setting change or setting reference. Then, when the setting change process is completed, the main control CPU72 executes step S217a. The reason for shifting to step S217a is that an external signal (security signal) is output in the external information management process.

Step S207: The main control CPU72 executes a switch management process. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous port input process (step S203), the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85. Based on the winning detection signals from the first winning opening switch 86 and the second winning opening switch 81, the event that occurred during the game is determined, and the processing according to the respectively occurring event is executed. The details of the processing will be described later.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 causes the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that the event that triggers (the trigger for the lottery) has occurred. Moreover, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred.

Step S208: The main control CPU72 executes the addition number calculation process. This process is a process of the used area. In this process, the main control CPU72, the game state, each switch (out switch 99, middle start winning opening switch 80, right starting winning opening switch 82, first winning opening switch 86, second winning opening switch 81, first The state of the count switch 84, the second count switch 85, etc.) is confirmed, and "the value to be added to the RAM outside the area (the number of prize balls generated during 4 ms, the number of additions such as the number of outs)" for the base calculation is confirmed. To calculate. Specifically, the main control CPU72 executes a process of determining the values of the number A of shot balls (number of additions for normal out), the number B of shots (number of additions for total out), and the number of acquired balls (number of addition for normal prize balls). To do. The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S209, Step S210: The main control CPU72 executes a special game management process and a normal game management process. These processes are for specifically progressing the game in the pachinko machine 1.

In the special game management process (step S209), the main control CPU72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device. The variable display or the stop display by 35 is determined, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the processing will be described later.

In the normal game management process (step S210), the main control CPU72 determines the variable display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33, and controls the operation of the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To do. For example, the main control CPU72 stores the random number (ordinary symbol determination random number) acquired upon the passage of the starting gate 20 in the previous switch management processing (step S207), and in this normal game management processing The random number value is read from the memory and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range. When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 variably displays the normal symbol and performs a stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 turns on the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is excited to operate. On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU72 performs the stop display of the normal symbol in a mode that is out of alignment after the variable display.

Step S211: The main control CPU72 executes a state management process. In this processing, the main control CPU72 is collected in the abnormal winning frequency (a state in which the number of balls entering the medium starting winning opening 26 and the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is abnormally large) and the base abnormality (the back side of the game board unit 8). Error state such as the number of game balls, that is, the total number of prize balls to each winning hole 22, 24, 26, 28a, 30b, 31b is larger than the number of game balls hit in the game area 8a). Check whether it has occurred. When an error state is detected, the main control CPU72 has generated an abnormality by outputting a security signal to the hall computer in the game hall and by transmitting a predetermined error command to the effect control device 124. To notify. In addition, in this process, the main control CPU72 may perform an error process related to door opening and fraud detection (magnet, radio wave, vibration, etc.).

Step S212: The main control CPU72 executes a winning opening switch process. In this process, when each input port ON detection flag stored based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous port input process (step S203) is ON, The target prize ball control counters are incremented by 1 and updated.

Step S213: The main control CPU72 executes a payout control management process. In this process, the main control CPU72 first confirms whether or not the payout command buffer is empty (whether the payout command to be transmitted is set), and if it is not empty (the payout command is set), the payout command buffer is issued. The various payout commands output to the buffer are transmitted to the payout control device 92. For example, the payout command indicating the start mode at power-on is set in the course of the CPU initialization process, output to the payout command buffer, and the payout command indicating the start mode is transmitted in this process. On the other hand, if the payout command buffer is empty, the process proceeds to a process for instructing payout of prize balls. The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the prize ball control counter is 0, and if the prize ball control counter is not 0, the payout controller 92 issues a payout command for designating the prize balls, which indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to this counter. Send to. More specifically, a payout command designating a prize ball corresponding to each prize ball control counter is transmitted in this process. In the transmission of the payout command, the payout command permission signal is input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and the number of payout commands set in the transmission data register (transmission FIFO) is a predetermined number. If it is less than (more specifically, the payout command set in the transmission FIFO has been transmitted, or is currently being transmitted and the transmission FIFO has an empty space).

Further, particularly when the power is turned on, when the payout command set in the course of the CPU initialization process is normally transmitted, the main control CPU72 turns on the firing permission signal in response to this. Specifically, the main control CPU72 clears the payout command buffer output when the power is turned on, and turns on the firing permission signal by setting a specific bit of the output port. As a result, after confirming the normal operation after the power is turned on, the launch of the game ball is permitted, and the launch enable signal is sent to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, whereby the game ball can be launched. It becomes a state.

In the payout control management process, the main control CPU72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the content of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124. When the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, the first profit (for example, 15 game balls) Generate a corresponding prize ball content command. It should be noted that generating a command means storing the command in the subcommand transmission buffer (the same applies hereinafter). When a winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, a prize ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for example, 10 game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 16) of the main loop process.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls acquired]
The number of prize balls at the starting opening of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the starting opening of the second special symbol are each set to one or more specified numbers. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting opening of the first special symbol and the starting opening of the second special symbol. Furthermore, based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls (the average number of balls that can be obtained during the series from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state), the minimum number of prize balls is set. You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired, the number of times the big winning opening is opened, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings of the big winning opening, and the number of prize balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are satisfied, a big hit may be set in which the number of game balls obtained by one big hit is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of game balls obtained.

Step S215: The main control CPU72 executes a test signal management process. This processing can be processing outside the area. In this process, the main control CPU72 is the internal state of itself (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, launch position designation state, during big hit, during small hit, during probability variation function operation, during time reduction function operation, etc. ) Is generated and stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S216: The main control CPU72 executes the LED display setting process. In this process, the main control CPU72, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a, the second special A process for generating common output data for controlling lighting of the LED included in the symbol working memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38 and the like is executed. The process related to the performance display monitor 200 is executed in the performance display monitor control process.

More specifically, the main control CPU72 is based on the variable display and stop display of symbols determined in the special game management process (step S209) and the normal game management process (step S210), the operation memory number display, the game state display, etc. Then, a drive signal for lighting each lamp in a corresponding manner is generated as common output data.

Step S217: The main control CPU72 executes a solenoid data setting process. In this process, the main control CPU72, the normal electric auditors product solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90 and the second big winning generated in the special game management process (step S209) and the normal game management process (step S210). The drive signals, test signals, etc. of the mouth solenoid 97 are combined (combined) and stored in the port output buffer. After that, the main control CPU72 executes a solenoid data port output process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether a value is stored in each output buffer (port output buffer), and if the value is stored, outputs it to the port. For example, each drive signal of each solenoid 88, 90, 97 stored in the port output buffer is output to the port. In this case, each drive signal is transmitted to the corresponding solenoid 88, 90, 97, and each solenoid performs an operation according to the drive signal.

Step S217a: Next, the main control CPU72 executes an external information management process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 sends an external information signal (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination frequency information, big hit information, starting opening information, security signal, etc.) to the hall computer in the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Is stored in the port output request buffer.
In the external information management process, an external signal (security signal) is output when the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to.

In this embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” as the big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Equipment and hall computer) can provide various jackpot information (external information signal output means). That is, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “jackpots 1” to “jackpots 5” and output, so that the type (winning type) of jackpots can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Recognize changes in probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened symbol fluctuation time, or generate a small hit (a condition device does not work) that is not classified as a "big hit" even if not winning It is possible to aggregate and manage. Also, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether each jackpot is currently in the jackpot. Alternatively, it is possible to recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened symbol variation time. In this external information management process, the main control CPU 72 controls the output states (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S218: The main control CPU72 executes interrupt prohibition processing.

Step S218a: The main control CPU72 executes a register saving process.

Step S219: The main control CPU72 executes performance display monitor control processing. This processing is processing outside the area. In this processing, the main control CPU72 executes processing such as switching of display contents of the performance display monitor 200, and the base value calculated in the performance display monitor total division processing (step S145 of FIG. 16) of the main loop processing. Drive signal for displaying on the performance display monitor 200 is generated as data for common output. The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S219a: The main control CPU72 executes register restoration processing. As a result, the register values saved in the process of step S218a are restored.

Step S220: The main control CPU72 executes an interrupt permission process. By permitting the interrupt here, another interrupt can be generated while the next step and subsequent steps of the timer interrupt process are being executed. In this way, multiple interrupts are permitted in the timer interrupt processing.
Note that the interrupt controller 192 executes acceptance of interrupt request signals, priority control of multiple interrupts, and the like.

Step S221: The main control CPU72 executes a firing position management process. In this process, the main control CPU72 executes a process of determining the launch position of the game ball according to the progress of the game (shooting position determining means). Note that this process may be executed during the special game management process. The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S222: The main control CPU72 restores the values of the HL, DE, BC, and AF registers saved in step S200 to the respective registers, terminates the timer interrupt processing, and returns to the main loop processing of the CPU initialization processing.

[Interrupt management by interrupt controller]
In the main control device 70, an XINT interrupt (interrupt request output by the parallel I/O port 79 which is the source of interrupt processing at the time of power cutoff notice) and an SCU interrupt during execution of the CPU initialization processing which is the main control program. (The interrupt request output by the serial communication circuit 196 which is the source of the serial communication reception interrupt process) and the PTC interrupt (the interrupt request output by the timer circuit 194 which is the source of the timer interrupt process) may occur. These interrupt requests are managed and controlled by the interrupt controller 192 installed in the main controller 70. The interrupt controller 192 performs control (so-called maskable interrupt control) that permits acceptance of an interrupt request by an interrupt enable instruction (EI instruction) of the main control CPU 72 and prohibits acceptance of an interrupt request by an interrupt disable instruction (DI instruction). ing.

Since the XINT interrupt, the SCU interrupt, and the PTC interrupt are all generated based on independent generation factors having no interdependence, it is naturally possible that a plurality of interrupt requests occur at the same time. Therefore, the interrupt controller 192 controls each interrupt request in accordance with a predetermined priority order of interrupt requests in consideration of importance of interrupt processing, processing efficiency, and the like.

More specifically, the priority of the interrupt request (interrupt processing) is defined in the interrupt vector table, the XINT interrupt (interrupt processing at the time of power-off notice) has the lowest priority, and the PTC interrupt (timer interrupt processing) has the lowest priority. The next highest priority is set, and the highest priority is set for the SCU interrupt (serial communication reception interrupt processing) (see FIGS. 17 to 19).

By setting the interrupt vector table in the early stage of the CPU initialization process, the interrupt controller 192 can perform priority control of interrupt requests generated at subsequent timings. In reality, after the CPU initialization process transits to the main loop process, if any interrupt request occurs between the time when the interrupt is permitted and the time when the interrupt is prohibited, the interrupt controller 192 returns the accepted interrupt request. Control based on the priority set in the interrupt vector table. For example, when the XINT interrupt and the PTC interrupt are accepted at the same time, the PTC interrupt (timer interrupt process) having a higher priority is processed first. While the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the XINT interrupt is in an interrupt waiting state, and after the timer interrupt processing is completed, the XINT interrupt (power interruption notice interrupt processing) is executed.

By thus controlling the interrupt request based on the priority order, the interrupt controller 192 enables the main controller 70 to execute multiple interrupts.

[Dynamic port output processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of dynamic port output processing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S160: The main control CPU72 executes processing for clearing the output port 0. As a result, the display on the main display is cleared. The output port 0 is a port that outputs data regarding the main display.

Step S161: The main control CPU72 executes processing for clearing the output port 2. As a result, the display on the performance display monitor 200 is cleared. The output port 2 is a port that outputs data regarding the performance display monitor 200.

The reason why the processes of steps S160 and S161 are executed is that, in the case of the dynamic lighting system, the control process may run away when the common data is referenced unless the display is erased.

After the processing of steps S160 and S161, a blanking time end wait processing can be executed. With this waiting time, the display data can be erased and the data can be output after a certain time has elapsed. This waiting time is also a waiting time for avoiding a runaway control process. In addition, you may perform the process of the following steps S162 and step S163 during this waiting time.

Step S162: The main control CPU72 executes a process of updating the common counter within the range of 0-3. As a result, the common number to be output is updated.

Step S163: The main control CPU72 executes a process of acquiring common data corresponding to the common counter. Thereby, the data corresponding to the common to be output can be acquired.

Step S164: The main control CPU72 executes a process of outputting common data to the output port 1. By outputting the common data to the output port 1, the common data can be output while switching the common. The output port 1 is a port that outputs data designating a common number (common 0 to 3) corresponding to the common counter.

Step S165: The main control CPU72 executes a process of acquiring display data according to the common counter. The display data is stored in the RAM of the used area.

The display data to be acquired is roughly divided into two types, the first data is data for the main display unit, and the second data is data for the performance display monitor 200.

The first main display data is generated as common output data in the LED display setting process (FIG. 61).

The data for the second performance display monitor 200 may be generated as data for displaying the base in the performance display monitor display processing (step S646) of the performance display monitor control processing (FIG. 65), and the setting may be changed. It may be generated as data for displaying the set value in steps S334 to S346 of the process (FIG. 28).

Here, regarding the data for the second performance display monitor 200, the display data is set in the common 0 to 3 common buffers regardless of whether the base is displayed or the set value is displayed. The data will be overwritten.

The processing of step S169 of FIG. 23 and the processing of step S173 of FIG. 24 are the same processing, but when the processing of step S169 of FIG. Since the data regarding the set value is stored in the buffer, the content regarding the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200. On the other hand, when the process of step S173 of FIG. 24 is executed, since the data regarding the base is stored in the common 0 to 3 buffers in common, the content regarding the base is displayed on the performance display monitor 200.

Step S166: The main control CPU72 confirms whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H” or “03H”.

As a result, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S167a. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S169.

Step S167a: The main control CPU72 executes the process of outputting to the output port 0. Specifically, the process of setting the display on the main display is executed. As a result, the data specified by the specified common is output. The data output here is the common output data generated by the LED display setting process. By setting the common output data in the common port output buffer, each lamp mounted on the integrated display substrate 89 Lighting can be controlled by a dynamic lighting system.

Step S167b: The main control CPU72 executes an interrupt prohibition process.
Step S167c: The main control CPU72 executes a register saving process.

Step S168a: The main control CPU72 executes performance display monitor output processing. This processing is processing outside the area. Therefore, this process is executed after the interrupt prohibition process is executed. By executing this process, the data specified by the specified common is output. The details of the processing will be described later.

By executing such processing, the main control CPU72 can execute the processing of displaying the base on the performance display monitor 200 (base-related processing) as the processing included in the processing outside the area (second processing). Yes (second processing execution means).

Step S168b: The main control CPU72 executes a register restoration process.
Step S168c: The main control CPU72 executes an interrupt permission process.

Step S169: The main control CPU72 executes the process of outputting to the output port 2. Specifically, the process of setting the display of the performance display monitor 200 (the process of outputting the display data acquired in the process of step S165 to the output port 2) is executed. This process is a process of the used area. By executing this process, the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200 during the setting change or the setting reference. Note that the processing other than the processing of step S168a can be used area processing.

By executing such a process, the buffer contents in the used area can be output to the main display unit during the normal game, and the buffer contents outside the area can be output to the performance display monitor 200. On the other hand, while the setting is being changed and the setting is being referred to, the buffer contents of the used area can be output to the performance display monitor 200, and the main display can be cleared and nothing can be displayed.

In the pachinko machine 1, there is a case where the main display device does not have a 7-segment LED (a case where a plurality of dot LEDs are geometrically arranged). In such a situation, it is necessary to use the 7-segment LED of the performance display monitor 200 in order to display the set value in an easy-to-understand manner. At this time, there is a regular concern that the processing is performed outside the area (the concern that the processing is not performed in the used area although the processing is related to the game).

Since the processing related to the performance display monitor 200 is permitted to be executed outside the area, basically, the display processing of the performance display monitor 200 is executed outside the area.
However, in the display process of the 7-segment LED of the performance display monitor, the process of displaying the set value may be included in the use area because it may correspond to the game-related process.

Accordingly, the process of displaying the set value on the performance display monitor 200 can be executed in the use area, and regular concern can be avoided.

By executing such processing, the main control CPU72 can execute the processing of displaying the set value on the performance display monitor 200 as the processing included in the processing of the used area (first processing) (first processing). Processing execution means).

Upon completion of the above processing, the main control CPU72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

[Performance display monitor output processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the performance display monitor output process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S170: The main control CPU72 executes stack pointer save processing. By this processing, the stack pointer of the used area is saved.

Step S171: The main control CPU72 executes processing for setting a stack pointer outside the area.

Step S172: The main control CPU72 executes a register saving process. The stack pointer outside the area is used to save the register.

Step S173: The main control CPU72 executes a process of outputting data.
Specifically, the process of setting the display of the performance display monitor 200 (the process of outputting the display data acquired in the process of step S165 of FIG. 23 to the output port 2) is executed. By executing this processing, the base is displayed on the performance display monitor 200 during the normal game.

This process is the same as step S169 in FIG. 23, but the content of the data output to the output port 2 (content displayed on the performance display monitor 200) is different.
In this process (step S173), since the data regarding the base is acquired in step S165 of FIG. 23, the data regarding the base is output to the output port 2 and the content regarding the base is displayed on the performance display monitor 200.
On the other hand, in step S169 of FIG. 23, since the data regarding the set value is acquired in step S165 of FIG. 23, the data regarding the set value is output to the output port 2 and the content regarding the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200. ..

Since the output of the common is executed in the processing relating to the used area (since the common number is used in common; see step S164 in FIG. 23), the processing of outputting only the data is executed in this processing. As a result, the data specified by the specified common is output. The data output here is the common output data generated by the performance display monitor display processing. By setting the common output data (base display data) in the common port output buffer, the performance display monitor It is possible to control the lighting of each lamp mounted on the 200 by a dynamic lighting method.

Specifically, the main control CPU72 switches either the previous base or the current base at predetermined intervals together with the corresponding identifier "bL." or "b6." to the performance display monitor 200. Executes the process of setting the common output data for display in the port output buffer. The display content on the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on the common output data (driving signal) set here.

Step S166: The main control CPU72 executes a register restoration process.

Step S167: The main control CPU72 executes a stack pointer restoration process. By executing this process, the process returns to the stack pointer of the used area and then returns to the processing related to the used area.
Upon completion of the above processing, the main control CPU72 returns to the dynamic port output processing (FIG. 23).

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the relationship between the timer interrupt process and the dynamic port output process.
The timer interrupt has an interrupt priority lower than that of the serial communication reception interrupt (see FIGS. 17 to 19).
Here, bold dotted arrows in the figure indicate interrupt prohibited sections (dotted arrows A1 to A3), and bold solid arrows in the figure indicate interrupt permitted sections (solid arrows B1 to B3).

In the timer interrupt process, first, a register save process (S200) and an interrupt flag initialization process (S201) are executed. This section is an interrupt prohibited section (see dotted line arrow A1).

When an interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 (program, assembler) of the present embodiment automatically enters the same state as when the instruction of interrupt prohibition is used. Therefore, when the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is disabled internally (as hardware). Therefore, in order to permit the interrupt, it is necessary to execute the interrupt permission process.

Therefore, in the timer interrupt process, the interrupt permission process (S201a) is executed next. By executing this process, the interrupt permission section is started (see the solid arrow B1).

When the dynamic port output process (S202) is called from the timer interrupt process, the process of clearing the output port 0, the process of clearing the output port 2 and the like are executed in the dynamic port output process (S160, S161). This section is an interrupt enable section (see solid arrow B1).

In the dynamic port output processing, interrupt prohibition processing (S167b) is then executed. By executing this processing, the interrupt prohibited section is started (see the dotted line arrow A2).

In the dynamic port output processing, register save processing (S167c), performance display monitor output processing (S168a), and register restore processing (S168b) are further executed. This section is an interrupt prohibited section (see dotted arrow A2).

In the dynamic port output process, finally, the interrupt permission process (S168c) is executed. By executing this process, the interrupt permission section is started (see solid line arrow B2).

The process returns from the dynamic port output process to the timer interrupt process and executes various processes. This section is an interrupt enable section (see solid arrow B2).

In the timer interrupt process, an interrupt prohibition process (S218) is then executed. By executing this processing, the interrupt prohibited section is started (see the dotted line arrow A3).
In the timer interrupt process, a register save process (S218a), a performance display monitor control process (S219), and a register restore process (S219a) are further executed. This section is an interrupt prohibited section (see dotted arrow A3).

Then, in the timer interrupt process, an interrupt permission process (S220) is executed. By executing this processing, the interrupt permission section is started (see the solid arrow B3).

As described above, in this embodiment, since the "serial communication reception interrupt process" having a higher interrupt priority than the "timer interrupt process" is set, the "performance display monitor control process (S219)" and the "performance display monitor output" are set. "Processing (S165)" is executed after disabling interrupts.

Therefore, during execution of the "performance display monitor control process (S219)" and the "performance display monitor output process (S165)", even if a "serial communication reception interrupt" with a high interrupt priority occurs, no interruption occurs. The "performance display monitor control process (S219)" and the "performance display monitor output process (S165)" are continuously executed.
In this case, the “performance display monitor control process” and the “performance display monitor output process” are completed, and the “serial communication reception interrupt process” is executed at the timing when the interrupt is permitted. Since the reception data related to the interrupt is stored in the reception buffer, even if the timing for extracting the reception data is delayed, no problem occurs because the processing related to the reception data is executed thereafter.

[Processing Content of Main Control CPU 72]
The main control CPU72 executes a timer interrupt process (first process) (first process execution means). Further, when a serial communication reception interrupt (predetermined interrupt) occurs during execution of the timer interrupt processing, the main control CPU72 interrupts the execution of the timer interrupt processing and executes a serial communication reception interrupt processing different from the timer interrupt processing ( Second processing) is executed (second processing execution means).

The timer interrupt process (first process) includes an interrupt permission process that permits the serial communication reception interrupt, and an interrupt non-permission process that monitors the exit history and does not permit the serial communication reception interrupt.

The interrupt permission process is a process related to the used area, for example, a process (special game management process or the like) excluding the “performance display monitor control process (S219)” and the “performance display monitor output process (S165)”.
The interrupt non-permission processing is processing relating to outside the area, for example, “performance display monitor control processing (S219)” and “performance display monitor output processing (S165)”.

When executing the interrupt non-permission processing, the main control CPU72 executes the interrupt non-permission processing with the serial communication reception interrupt being prohibited (first processing execution means).

Further, when executing the interrupt non-permission processing, the main control CPU72 executes the processing for prohibiting the serial communication reception interrupt before executing the interrupt non-permission processing, the interrupt non-permission processing, and the interrupt non-permission processing. After the execution, processing for permitting the serial communication reception interrupt is executed (first processing execution means).

The interrupt non-permission processing is a part of the processing for calculating the base. Some of the processes for calculating the base are the “performance display monitor control process (S219)” and the “performance display monitor output process (S165)”.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a modification of the timer interrupt processing.
Although the timer interrupt processing has been described in the order of the processing shown in FIG. 22, it can be modified as follows.

The order of the timer interrupt processing is [1] dynamic port output processing, [2] addition number calculation processing (at least winning detection and calculation of prize balls), and [3] performance display monitor control processing.

[1] The reason why the dynamic port output processing is given the highest priority is to keep the common switching timing and the data display time constant. Therefore, [1] the dynamic port output processing is performed in the first half (early stage) of the timer interrupt processing.

[2] The reason why the addition number calculation process is prioritized next is that in the performance display monitor control process, the number of prize balls to be used and the number of outs to be used are calculated in advance within the use area. This is because it must be performed before the display monitor control processing.

[3] The reason why the performance display monitor control process is the last priority is that the performance display monitor control process needs to be executed after the addition number calculation process is completed.

The processing to be inserted into [A], [B] or [C] in the figure is not limited to the arrangement example of FIG. 22, but any processing (input port update processing, input port edge detection processing, winning port (Determination process, special symbol process, normal symbol process, error process, external output process, test signal output process, port output process, etc.) can be inserted.

At this time, the calculated base value is different depending on whether the process related to the special symbol (special game management process) is performed before or after the addition number calculation process. This is because it is determined in the addition number calculation process whether or not a big hit is in progress, and there are cases where the number of outs, which is the denominator of the base value, is counted and cases where it is not counted.

Specifically, if the process related to the special symbol is before the number-of-addition calculation process, it is a big hit in the process related to the special symbol within one interruption, and if the out switch is detected, the out The number is not counted (out-switch detection is considered as a big hit and is excluded from the base calculation).

On the other hand, if the process related to the special symbol is after the number-of-addition calculation process, within one interruption, it is a big hit in the process related to the special symbol, and if the out switch is detected, the number of outs is counted. (Because it is not a big hit at the time of the calculation of the number of additions, the detection of the out switch is valid and is not excluded from the calculation of the base).

In this way, the value of the base will change depending on whether to place the process related to the special symbol before or after the addition number calculation process, but the process related to the special symbol is a game specification or a base to be calculated. It can be arranged at an arbitrary place in the timer interrupt processing according to the contents of.

27 and 28 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the setting change process.
Step S300: The main control CPU72 executes the process of loading the set value buffer. As a result, the main control CPU72 can obtain the current set value.

Step S302: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed and before the setting is confirmed. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed and the setting is not yet fixed (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S304. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the setting is being changed and the setting is not yet fixed (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S308.

Step S304: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed. In the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 304 is also used as the setting change switch. Therefore, although the pressing of the RAM clear switch 304 is confirmed here, the RAM clear switch 304 is also used as the setting change switch. However, if the setting change switch is separately provided, it is confirmed whether or not the setting change switch is pressed in this process.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S306. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S308.

Step S306: The main control CPU72 executes a process of adding 1 to the set value. For example, when the setting value loaded in step S300 is “0 (setting 1)”, when this processing is executed, the setting value becomes “1 (setting 2)”. If the setting value loaded in step S300 is "1 (setting 2)", the setting value becomes "2 (setting 3)" when this processing is executed. If the setting value loaded in step S300 is "5 (setting 6)", when this processing is executed, the setting value returns to "0 (setting 1)".

Here, if the setting value loaded in step S300 is "5 (setting 6)", the setting value is not restored to "6 (out of range)" by executing this process, and You may perform the process which correct|amends to "0 (setting 1)" by step S308 and step S310.

Step S308: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the set value is in the range of "0 (setting 1)" to "5 (setting 6)". This process is a process for avoiding setting of an unintended setting value.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the set value is in the range of “0 (setting 1)” to “5 (setting 6)” (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S312. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the set value is in the range of “0 (setting 1)” to “5 (setting 6)” (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S310.

Step S310: The main control CPU72 executes a process of setting "0 (setting 1)". Thereby, when an unintended set value is set, "0 (setting 1)" can be set.

Step S312: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed and before the setting is fixed. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed and the setting is not yet fixed (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S314. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the setting is being changed and the setting is not yet fixed (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S322 (in-page connector 1→1).

Step S312: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the setting key is changed from ON to OFF. When the input signal from the setting key switch 302 changes from ON to OFF, the main control CPU 72 can determine that the setting key has changed from ON to OFF.
The determination process may be a determination process of whether the setting key (setting key switch 302) is OFF.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S316. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S334 (outer page connector C→C).

Step S316: The main control CPU72 executes a process of setting "02H (during setting change/after confirmation)" in the setting change flag.

Step S318: The main control CPU72 executes a process of generating a "setting confirmation designation command" as a subcommand. The "setting confirmation designation command" can include information that the setting has been confirmed and information of the setting value.

Step S320: The main control CPU72 executes a sub command set process. By executing this processing, the "setting confirmation designation command" is set in the subcommand transmission buffer. The set “setting confirmation designation command” is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process. When this processing ends, the main control CPU72 next executes step S332 (in-page connector 2→2).

Step S322: The main control CPU72 confirms whether the setting key is ON or the inner frame is opened.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting key is ON or the inner frame is opened (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S332 (in-page connector 2→2). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting key is ON or the inner frame is open (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S324.

Step S324: The main control CPU72 executes a process of updating the inner frame closing timer.
In this processing, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value to the inner frame closing timer when the inner frame (for example, the inner frame assembly 7) is closed, and then counts down the timer with each passage of time (every time this module is called). To do.

Step S324: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the inner frame closing timer has timed up. Specifically, if the value of the inner frame closing timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU72 determines that the inner frame closing timer has not expired (No). In this case, the main control CPU72 executes step S334 (out-of-page connector C→C).

After that, when the value of the inner frame closing timer becomes 0 with the lapse of time, the main control CPU72 determines that the inner frame closing timer has timed out (Yes), and executes step S328.

Step S328: The main control CPU72 executes processing for clearing the setting change flag. Specifically, the main control CPU72 executes the process of setting the setting change flag to "0".

Step S330: The main control CPU72 executes the process of shifting to the process when the setting change is completed. Specifically, the process to shift to step S152a (step S153) in FIG. 21 is executed by the jump command (out-page connector “shift to process when setting change is completed”→“when setting change is completed”).

By executing such processing, when the setting change and the setting reference are completed, the state shifts to the reset state. Specifically, the process jumps to the save process when the power is cut off. Then, at the jump destination, after the checksum calculation, the power supply is confirmed, and the process returns to the beginning (CPU initialization process) of the program. As a result, the place where the configuration of the program becomes "Initialization -> setting change or setting reference (temporary main loop) -> initialization after setting change -> original main loop" is "initialization -> main loop (normal game, Change settings and settings)”).

Here, when a setting function (setting changing device 300) is added to the pachinko machine 1, the process at power-on is (1) initialization process, (2) main loop process during setting change, (3) setting Re-initialization processing after change (clearing processing of display, re-clearing processing of RAM, transition processing to normal game, etc.), (4) main loop processing during the game must be configured.
In this way, when the setting function is added, the processing before and after the setting change processing is required in addition to the setting change processing itself, so that the amount of program code is significantly increased.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a process at power-on (at least part of CPU initialization process) and a save process at power-off notice (at least part of power-off notice interrupt process) are performed. It is also used as a process after the setting is changed.

Specifically, in the setting change process called during the timer interrupt, if the end condition of the setting change or the setting reference is satisfied, it does not return to the timer interrupt process, but the save process at the time of power cutoff notice (power cutoff notice interrupt process In the middle of).

In the evacuation process when the power is cut off, all output ports are cleared, checksums are calculated and saved, and then the power remains on, the program returns to the beginning (CPU initialization process) and the power is restored. A normal game state is entered through the same initialization process as.

In this way, the processing after the setting change is combined with the processing at the time of power-on and the saving processing at the time of the power-off notice, so that the program code can be compared with the case where the processing after the setting change is performed by a dedicated program It is possible to suppress the increase amount of.

Step S332: The main control CPU72 executes a process of clearing the inner frame closing timer. Then, when this processing is finished, the main control CPU72 next executes step S334 (out-page connector C→C).

Step S334: The main control CPU72 executes a process of setting the display data "rn." in the common 0,1 buffer.

Step S336: The main control CPU72 confirms whether the setting is being changed and before the setting is confirmed. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed and the setting is not yet fixed (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S338. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the setting is being changed and the setting is not yet fixed (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S340.

Step S338: The main control CPU72 executes the process of setting the data corresponding to "-" in the common 2 buffer as the display data. The main control CPU72 then executes step S342.

Step S340: The main control CPU72 executes processing for setting data corresponding to "blank (non-display)" in the common 2 buffer as display data. The main control CPU72 then executes step S342.

Step S342: The main control CPU72 executes the process of loading the set value buffer. As a result, the main control CPU72 can acquire the set value after the setting is changed.

Step S344: The main control CPU72 executes a process of converting the set value into display data.

Step S346: The main control CPU72 executes the process of setting the display data converted by the process of step S344 as the display data in the common 3 buffer.

For example, when the setting value is “5 (setting 6)”, the setting is being changed, and the setting is not yet fixed, the four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 of the performance display monitor 200 have “r” in order from the left side. “N.”, “−”, and “6” are displayed. When the set value is “0 (setting 1)”, the setting is being changed, and the setting is not yet fixed, the four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 of the performance display monitor 200 have “r” in order from the left side. “N.”, “blank (non-display)” and “1” are displayed.

That is, the display mode of “r”, “n.”, “−”, and “setting value” of the performance display monitor 200 is the display mode (first display mode) during setting change, and the “r” and “r” of the performance display monitor 200. The display modes "n.", "blank (non-display)" and "setting value" are display modes (second display mode) during setting reference.

By performing such processing, the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value in different display modes during the setting change and the reference of the set value, and when the set value is displayed, Can be turned off.
Upon completion of the above processing, the main control CPU72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

[Switch management processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of switch management processing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S10: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input (the lottery trigger is generated) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol memory update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, when the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input (the lottery trigger is generated) from the right starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory updating process. In this case as well, the details of the specific processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S20 to execute the first special winning opening counting process. In the first big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S21a.

Step S21a: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S21b to execute the second special winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, when the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S24 to execute the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current normal symbol working memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, acquires a normal random number per symbol. To do. Further, the main control CPU72 normally increments the symbol working memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU72 stores the acquired normal symbol per random value in the random number storage area of the RAM76. On the other hand, when the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update processing (step S12 in FIG. 29). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update processing will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter, and confirms whether the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (group number) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the like stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) that are commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section has a jackpot determination random number and a jackpot symbol. It is possible to store one random number as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU72 adds one to the first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol working memory number counter is stored in, for example, the working memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a will be controlled.

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol through the sampling circuit 77 from the random number circuit 75 (first lottery element acquisition, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is obtained by designating the pin address of the random number circuit 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, address designation is performed twice, one byte for each of upper and lower bits. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves it as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol in the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU72 acquires the big hit symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the big hit symbol random number counter area of the RAM76. The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the big hit symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves it as the big hit symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol in the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU72 sequentially obtains the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM76 as the random value relating to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition). means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the varying random number counter area. Then, the main control CPU72, when each of the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number is acquired from the designated address, saves these to the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU72 transfers the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach judgment random number, and the variation pattern determining random number that are saved to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are empty sections in the area. And store them as a set (storage means, lottery element storage means). The plurality of sections are set in order (for example, first to fourth), and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The reading of the random number storage area is in the FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU72 executes the following steps S37, S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason for making this determination in the present embodiment is that the effect due to pre-reading is not performed for the ball entered during the big hit.

Step S37: In the case other than during the big hit (step S36: No), the main control CPU72 executes the acquisition time effect determination process for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the effect contents It is for making a judgment (so-called “look-ahead”). The details of the specific processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38: When returning from the production effect determination processing at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, "B8H") of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This upper byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), here, by combining the lower byte with the upper byte, for example, a command of one word length Will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU72 sets the working memory number increase effect command for the first special symbol. Specifically, with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of command, the number of working memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte of one word length. Generate a performance command. At this time, with respect to the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value is "result (change information) due to increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the number of working memories this time is “01H” as a result of incrementing the number of working memories “00H” up to the previous time by one. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous number of working memories "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "02H" to "03H". 04H” is displayed. The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the effect command this time is the operation memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU72 executes the effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This processing is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the operation memory number increase effect effect command generated in step S38a, and the starting mouth winning sound control command to the effect control device 124. It is a thing (memory number notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol working memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special symbol storage update process (step S16 in FIG. 29). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update processing will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter, and confirms whether the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the second special symbol operation memory number counter, it also represents the number (set number) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter has reached the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S41 and subsequent steps.

Step S41: The main control CPU72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 30), the lighting state of the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a is controlled based on the value of the counter added here.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number circuit 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 30) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU72 acquires a big hit symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the big hit symbol random number counter area of the RAM76. The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as step S33 (FIG. 30) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU72 sequentially obtains the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number relating to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). The acquisition of these random number values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 30) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU72 transfers the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach judgment random number, and the variation pattern random number that are saved to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers are empty sections in the area. To be stored as a set (storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 30) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the other hand, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason for making this determination in the present embodiment is that the effect due to the look-ahead is not performed for the ball entered during the big hit as well.

Step S46: If it is not during the big hit (step S45a: No), then the main control CPU72 executes the acquisition time effect determination process for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the second special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, and thereby the effect contents It is for judging. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S47: When returning from the production effect determination processing at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, "B9H") of the special figure destination determination effect command. This upper byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol”. Similarly, the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46), so here, by combining the lower byte with the upper byte, for example, 1 word A long command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU72 sets the production command when the working memory number is increased for the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-long production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte that indicates the type of command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it can be shown that the value is "result (change information) due to an increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the effect command this time is the operation memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU72 executes the effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. Thereby, the special figure destination determination production command, the operation memory number increase production command, the starting mouth winning sound control command, etc. for the second special symbol are prepared to be transmitted to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means). .. Further, when the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29).

[Production determination process during acquisition]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the acquisition effect determination process. The main control CPU72 executes this acquisition time production determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 30, step S46 in FIG. 31) (previous determination Execution means, prefetch processing execution means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when entering the medium starting winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when entering the variable starting winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process relating to the first special symbol or a process relating to the second special symbol. The contents of the process will be described below according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU72 sets the lower byte portion (for example, "00H") of the special figure destination determination effect command (destination determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (when it is out of sync).

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU72 loads the big hit determination random number as a random number value for the first determination. The random number to be loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 30) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 31). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU72 determines whether the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is set according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1 (the winning probability according to the set value). Next, the main control CPU72 determines whether the operation result is 0 or a positive value, for example, from the value of the flag register. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a deviation pattern variation pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this processing, the main control CPU72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of deviation. The variation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects in advance the determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is the operation of the "time shortening function", the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-bound reach variation (non-shortening variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if there is. As a result, when the variation time corresponds to “outlier reach variation (non-shortening variation time)”, the main control CPU72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “time saving medium non-shortening variation time”. In the case of reach variation, the “reach group (reach type)” may be further determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the variation time does not correspond to the “outlier reach variation (non-shortening variation time)”, the main control CPU72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “shorter time reduction medium variation time”. Alternatively, if the current state is the non-operation (low probability state) of the “time reduction function”, the main control CPU 72 responds to “normally out-of-range reach variation” based on the loaded reach determination random number. Or not. As a result, when the variation time corresponds to “normally outreach variation”, the main control CPU72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normally outreach variation time”. On the other hand, when the variation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach variation", the main control CPU72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation reach time". Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of a small hit, similar to the process at the time of the above-mentioned deviation.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU72 ends the acquisition effect determination process after executing the determination result management process of step S82, and calls the first special symbol storage update process (FIG. 29) or the second special symbol. The process returns to the memory update process (FIG. 30). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is within the range of the hit value in the determination of the previous step S54 (step S54: No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S56.

Step S56: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag according to the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when the fluctuation has not yet started but the winning value is among the big hit determination random numbers stored so far. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the big hit determination random number stored so far, if the big hit design random number paired with this corresponds to "any probability variation design", probability state plan For example, "A0H" is set in the flag. This value represents a flag value for setting the high probability state as a schedule in advance determination (prefetch determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the big hit determination random number stored so far, if the big hit design random number paired with this corresponds to "one of the normal designs", the probability state schedule For example, "01H" is set in the flag. This value represents a flag value for setting the normal (low) probability state as a schedule when pre-determining (pre-reading determination) the jackpot determining random number acquired after the jackpot determining random number. If there is no winning value among the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). The value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Note that, here, an example is given in which the "probability state schedule flag" is used to strictly perform prior hit determination, but in the case where the prior hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, this step S56 and subsequent steps are performed. Steps S58, S60, S62, S76, etc. may be omitted.

If the probability state schedule flag is not set yet (step S56: No), the main control CPU72 then executes step S66.

Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU72 next sets the low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register. The low-probability time comparison value is also set according to the low-probability winning probability (the winning probability corresponding to the set value) in the pachinko machine 1.

Step S68: Next, the main control CPU72 loads the "current probability state flag". The probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is high probability (during probability change), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low probability (normal), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). )).

Step S70: Then, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the loaded special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠01H), and as a result, if it represents a high probability (No. ), and then step S64 is executed.

Step S64: The main control CPU72 sets the high probability time comparison value. As a result, the low-probability time comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high-probability time comparison value is set according to the high-probability winning probability (the winning probability according to the set value) in the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not set yet and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability time and the next step S72. Will be executed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not indicate a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

Step S72: The main control CPU72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is outside the range of the winning value (lottery result destination determining means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines from the value of the flag register whether or not the operation result is a negative value (<0), and as a result, if the loaded random number is outside the hit value range (Yes). ), the main control CPU72 executes the above-described out-of-range variation pattern information pre-determination processing (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU72 executes a big hit symbol type determination process. This process is to determine the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit determination random number. For example, the main control CPU72 loads the big hit symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 30) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 31). Then, similar to the above-described step S54, the calculation using the comparison value is executed, and it is determined from the result whether it corresponds to the "probable variation symbol" or the "normal symbol" as the big hit type. The main control CPU72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

Step S76: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents a "normal symbol", the main control CPU72 sets the probability state schedule flag to the value "01H". On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents a "probability variation symbol", the main control CPU72 sets the value "A0H" to the probability state schedule flag. As a result, it is determined that the flag has been set in step S56 in the subsequent processing.

Step S78: The main control CPU72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. The special symbol destination determination value is set to, for example, "01H" when it corresponds to the "normal symbol", and is set to "A0H" when it corresponds to the "probability variation symbol". In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a large hitting variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this processing, the main control CPU72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of a big hit. The variation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, advance determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set according to the previous determination result (before the internal initial hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the prior hit determination is performed only with the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following steps S56, S58, S60, S62, and S76.

Step S56: The main control CPU72, after confirming that the value is already set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), then executes step S58.

Step S58: The main control CPU72 first sets the low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

Step S60: Next, the main control CPU72 loads the "probability state schedule flag". The probability state schedule flag is used to set a probability state on a scheduled basis in the subsequent prior determination based on the previous previous determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. .. If the probability state based on the immediately preceding prior determination result is to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above, and conversely the immediately preceding prior determination result. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

Step S62: Then, the main control CPU72 confirms whether the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high probability schedule (≠01H), and as a result, if it indicates a high probability schedule ( No), and then step S64 is executed to set a high probability time comparison value.

In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is intended to have a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and the next step S72 and subsequent steps are performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a high probability schedule but a normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent steps from S72 are executed. As a result, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in advance can be performed in consideration of subsequent changes in the internal state based on the previous determination result (normal probability state→high probability state, high probability state→normal probability state). ..

After finishing the above procedure, the main control CPU72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 30) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 31).

[Special game management processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of special game management processing.
Special game management processing, execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000), special symbol variation processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), big hit time variable winning device This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of the management process (step S5000) and the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit (step S6000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special game management process will be described along with each process.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special game management process as the return address in the stack pointer.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress status of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU72 selects the special symbol variation process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the “jump table” to select the process. However, in addition to such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process once and performs a conditional branch (continuation/return) by referring to the flags one by one in the first step, but in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU72 performs a work to prepare the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol. The details of the specific processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol variation process, the main control CPU72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is generated for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. In this case as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is generated for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, so that the stop display of the special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The big winning time variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the manner of the big hit in the special symbol stop displaying process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit mode, a trigger occurs to shift from a normal state until then to a big-hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player). During the big hit game, the jump destination is set to the big hit time variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the jackpot variable winning device management processing, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 until a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or counting the entering of 10 game balls) ), is excited for a preset number of times of continuous operation (for example, 15 times), whereby the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened/closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of special electric auditors). .. In the meantime, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to collectively collect a lot of prize balls (special game. Execution means). The opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit are called "rounds", and if the number of continuous operations is 15 in total, these are called "15 rounds". May be collectively referred to.

Further, when the main control CPU72 sets a special winning opening opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening/closing operations per round, the opening time, etc.) in the jackpot variable winning device management processing, the first variable winning device 30 for one round. Alternatively, each time the opening/closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1. The value of the round counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with the initial value set to 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 16). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big win) for that round.

When the big hit game is finished, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time shortened state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( High probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). In the "high probability state", the probability varying function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes about 10 times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the "time shortening state", the time shortening function is activated, the operation lottery for the ordinary symbol has a high probability as described above, and the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is reduced. Is extended and the number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). The “high-probability state” and the “time-reduced state” may be shifted to either one of them in terms of control, or may be shifted to both of them.

Step S6000: The small-hit-time variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the small hit in the special symbol stop display process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit mode, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the small hit game state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set to the small hitting variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), but almost all winnings to the first big winning opening occur. do not do.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, the following winning types are provided as a plurality of winning types, for example.
(1) “11 rounds, probable variation jackpots 1-11”
(2) “15 round probability variation jackpot 1-6”
(3) "8 round certainty big jackpot"
(4) "6 round certainty change jackpot"
(5) "11 round normal jackpot"
(6) "3 round certainty jackpot"
(7) “5 round certainty jackpot”
(8) "5 round regular jackpot"

The above-mentioned winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "11 round certainty variation big hit 1-11" corresponds to the big hit of "11 round certainty variation pattern 1-11", "11 round normal big hit" corresponds to the big hit of "11 round normal design". Therefore, in the following, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as a “winning symbol”.

[11 round probability variation patterns 1 to 11]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11," the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first special winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once, and this is continued until the 11th round. In the case of "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11", by operating the "probability variation function" and the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game, the "high probability time reduction state" is entered.

Here, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the elapse of the longest opening time when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. To be done. In addition, similarly to the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31, when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, without waiting for the elapse of the longest opening time. Will be closed.

[15 round probability variation patterns 1 to 7]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "15 round probability variation symbols 1 to 7," the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first big winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 or the second big winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once, and this is continued until the 15th round. In the case of "15 round probability variation symbols 1 to 7", the "probability variation function" and the "time reduction function" are activated after the jackpot game is completed, thereby shifting to the "high probability time reduction state".

[8 round probability variation pattern]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "8 round probability variation symbol", the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first big winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once, and this is continued until the eighth round. When it corresponds to the "8 round probability variation pattern", the "probability variation function" and the "time reduction function" are activated after the jackpot game is completed, so that the "high probability time reduction state" is entered.

[6 round certainty variation]
In the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "6 round probability variation symbol", the big hit game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the first big winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once, and this is continued until the sixth round. When the "6 round probability variation pattern" is applied, the "probability variation function" and the "time reduction function" are activated after the jackpot game is completed, thereby shifting to the "high probability time reduction state".

[11 round normal pattern]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "11 round normal symbol", the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first big winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once, and this is continued until the 11th round. In the case of "11 round normal", by operating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game, the "probability time reduction state" is entered.

[3 round probability variation pattern]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "three round probability variation symbol", the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the second special winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once, and this is continued until the third round. If the "3 round probability variation pattern" is applied, the "probability variation function" and the "time reduction function" are activated after the jackpot game is completed, thereby shifting to the "high probability time reduction state".

[5 round certainty variation]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "five round probability variation symbol", the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the second special winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once, and this is continued until the fifth round. If the "5 round probability variation pattern" is applied, the "probability variation function" and the "time reduction function" are activated after the jackpot game is completed, thereby shifting to the "high probability time reduction state".

[5 round normal pattern]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "5 round normal symbol", the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the second special winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once, and this is continued until the fifth round. In the case of "5 round normal", by operating the "time-reducing function" after the jackpot game, the "low probability time-reducing state" is entered.

In any case, when the winning symbol corresponds to any of the “probability variation symbols”, the player is provided with a privilege to shift the internal state to the “high probability time reduction state” after the big hit game is over. On the other hand, when the winning symbol corresponds to any of the "normal symbols", the internal state shifts to the "low probability time reduction state" after the big hit game is over.

The opening time during the big hit game, the interval time between rounds, and the ending time are “5.0 seconds”, “1.5 seconds”, and “7.0 seconds” which are common to each other. The opening time is the waiting time from the start of the big hit game until the big winning opening is opened, and the inter-round interval time is the waiting time set between the rounds and the ending time. The time is a waiting time set after the final round of the big hit game is finished.

[Small hits]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than non-winning. When the small hit is won, the small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 is opened/closed (special game execution means). In other words, in the special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 operates in the normal probability state or the high probability state). Game) is executed. In such a small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but almost no winning of the first big winning opening occurs. Also, even if the small hit game is over, the "probability variation function" does not operate and the "time reduction function" does not operate, so it shifts to the "high probability state" or "time reduction state". No benefits are granted (this is not a prerequisite). In addition, even if you win the small hit in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" will not end after the small hit game ends, and even if you win the small hit in the "time reduction state", The "time reduction state" does not end after the winning game ends (except when the maximum number of times is reached). In addition, in the present embodiment, the game specification is to set a small hit, but it may be a game specification not to set a small hit.

[Special symbol fluctuation pretreatment]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU72 confirms whether the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number is remaining (greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of operating memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 16). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies hereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU72 preferentially reads out one of the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if the random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 sequentially reads the random numbers from the first section and erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) Let me. The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next big hit determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol. Note that the program may be one in which random numbers are simply read in the order in which they are stored, without providing such a priority for each special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU72 subtracts one by one from the value of the working memory number counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is the shift of the random number) stored in the RAM76, and subtracts The latter value is set to the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". Thereby, the display mode of the stored number by the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a changes (decrease by 1). When the procedure up to this point is completed, the main control CPU72 next executes step S2300.

Step S2300: The main control CPU72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this processing, the main control CPU72 first sets a range of the big hit value, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability varying function is activated), and in the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that in the normal probability state. It If the random number value read at this time is within the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400. Here, the range of the big hit value is set according to the set value. Therefore, the range of the big hit value becomes wider in the high setting than in the low setting.

When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and judges whether the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The "small hit" here is something other than the non-win (miss), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a game turning point) to shift to the "high probability state" or the "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "small hit" is positioned as a condition that satisfies the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30, like the "big hit". The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different or the same in the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability varying function is activated). In any case, if the read random number value is within the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is preliminarily defined on the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-win, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are previously set. It is also possible to write each in the ROM 74, read this, and compare with the random number value to make a big hit determination. When a setting difference is set for the winning probability of the small hit, the range of the small hit value is set according to the set value. For this reason, the range of the small hit value is wider in the high setting than in the low setting.

Step S2400: The main control CPU72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set to the big hit flag in the big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU72 next executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set to the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine whether the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

Step S2404: The main control CPU72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disengagement. In this process, the main control CPU72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of the disengagement by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (when out of sync) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 16).

In the present embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of detachment is always one segment (center It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the lighted display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used on the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU72 executes the off-time variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern number when the special symbol is out (variation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the type (pattern) of variation display of the special symbol and to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of departure differs depending on whether or not it is in the "time reduction state", the main control CPU72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is the "time reduction state". Check if there is. In the "time-reduced state", the variation time at the time of deviation is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) except when the reach variation is basically performed (variation time determination means during shortening) ). Further, even if the reach variation is not performed even if it is not the “time shortening state”, the variation time at the time of deviation is based on, for example, the “variable display start operation memory number (0 to 3)” set in step S2200. It may be shortened (for example, the number of working memory at the start of variable display→about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memory at the start of varying display→about 8 seconds, the number of working memory at the beginning of varying display 2→5 Approximately 2 seconds, the number of working memory at the start of variable display 3 → 2.5 seconds) In addition, the stop display time of the symbol at the time of deviation is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of deviation) to the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of deviation to the stop symbol display timer. In addition, the information regarding the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a variation pattern command (the same applies at the time of winning).

In the present embodiment, if the result of the internal lottery corresponds to non-winning, for example, in the production, a control such as "reach production" is generated and is lost, or "reach production" is not generated and is controlled. I am trying. Then, in the "out-of-shift variation pattern selection table", variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, for example, "non-reach effect" and "reach effect" are defined in advance. One of the fluctuation patterns will be selected. It should be noted that the reach effect includes various reach effects such as normal reach effect, long reach effect, super reach effect, and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table at the time of detachment]
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the out-of-range variation pattern selection table (low probability/high probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table (variation pattern defining means) that is used when the player is out of the low-probability or high-probability non-time shortened state (when it is not won). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are set and stored in order from the head address, one byte each. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight stepwise different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The "variation pattern number" of "1" to "8" is assigned to each "comparison value".

The variation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to the variation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “6” and “7” are variation patterns that are out of reach after the reach. Correspondingly, the fluctuation pattern number “8” corresponds to the fluctuation pattern which is lost after the super reach. The fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter).

Here, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern have greatly different set lengths of fluctuation time. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the "reach fluctuation pattern" is It corresponds to a fluctuation time that is more than twice that (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds).

Then, the main control CPU72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the comparison value is set to the comparison value. The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201” and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the main control CPU72 selects "2" as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a deviation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table (variation pattern defining means) used when the player is out of the low probability time shortening state (when not winning). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are set and stored in order from the head address, one byte each. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight stepwise different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” of “21” to “28” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

The variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” correspond to the variation patterns that are out of reach without performing the reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “26” to “28” are variation patterns that are out of reach after the reach. It corresponds. However, since the fluctuation pattern numbers “21” to “25” are non-reach fluctuations due to time shortening fluctuations, a shortened fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time in the normal state. ..

The main control CPU72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201” and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the main control CPU72 selects "22" as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a deviation variation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table (variation pattern defining means) that is used when the player is out of the high probability time shortened state (when not winning). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are set and stored in order from the head address, one byte each. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight stepwise different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The "variation pattern number" of "41" to "48" is assigned to each "comparison value".

The variation pattern numbers “41” to “45” correspond to the variation patterns that are out of reach without performing the reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “46” to “48” are variation patterns that are out of reach after the reach. It corresponds. However, the fluctuation pattern numbers “41” to “45” are extremely shortened as the fluctuation time in the normal state (for example, about 0.5 seconds) in order to realize high-speed fluctuation in the high probability time shortened state. Is set.

The main control CPU72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201” and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the main control CPU72 selects "42" as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (special section) at the time of deviation.
This selection table is a table used in the special section in the high probability time shortened state or the low probability time shortened state in the case where the non-winning condition is met (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, the special section is a section to be transferred after the jackpot game in the case of "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbol", and the variation pattern selection counter value is 1 or more. It is a section to shift to.

Here, the variation patterns at the time of departure in the special section of the high probability time reduction state or the low probability time reduction state are all the same variation pattern (variation time is, for example, about 20 seconds) in order to realize the treasure challenge effect described later. Is set, and this selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach special variation pattern 50).

Therefore, the main control CPU72 selects "50" as the fluctuation pattern number, regardless of the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value. The non-reach special variation pattern 50 is a special variation pattern in which the variation time is fixed, and the variation time is not shortened by the number of memories.

[Refer to FIG. 34: Special symbol fluctuation preprocessing]
Steps S2404 and S2405 described above are the control procedure when the jackpot determination result is out of alignment (other than non-win), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a jackpot (step S2402: Yes). The main control CPU72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU72, based on the big hit symbol random number, for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), determines the type of the winning symbol of this time (big hit stop symbol number). The relationship between the jackpot random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU72 can refer to the big hit stop symbol selection table in the big hit stop symbol determination process, and determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning pattern at the time of a big hit]
In the present embodiment, as the winning symbol selected at the time of a big hit, "11 round probability variation symbol 1-11", "15 round probability variation symbol 1-6", "8 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol", "11 round""Normaldesign","3 round probability variation design", "5 round probability variation design", "5 round normal design" are prepared. In addition, each winning symbol may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "11 round probability variation pattern 1", "11 round probability variation pattern 1a", "11 round probability variation pattern 1b", "11 round probability variation pattern 1c", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected during the jackpot of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Stop symbol selection table for the first special symbol big hit]
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the kind of the winning symbol by referring to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "2", "3", "31", "1", " "10", "2", and "35" correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Also, the second column from the left, "11 round probability variation pattern 1-11", "15 round probability variation pattern 1", "8 round probability variation pattern", "6 round probability variation pattern" corresponding to each distribution value, "11 round normal pattern" is shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the proportions of "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 9" are respectively 2/100 (=2%), and "11 round probability variation symbol 10" is selected. The ratio is 3/100 (=3%), and the ratio of "11 round probability variation pattern 11" is selected is 31/100 (=31%), and "15 round probability variation pattern 1" is selected. The ratio is 1/100 (=1%), the ratio of selecting “8 round probability variation pattern” is 10/100 (=10%), and the ratio of selecting “6 round probability variation pattern” Is 2/100 (=2%), and the rate at which the “11th round normal symbol” is selected is 35/100 (=35%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a big hit symbol random number.

Here, the "substantial" in the figure is the number of round games that are long-opened in a jackpot game that includes a round game in which the special winning opening is short-opened and a round game in which the special winning opening is long-opened. Is shown. The round game may be executed using the first special winning opening or may be executed using the second special winning opening. Further, "next time" in the figure means that "10000 times" is set as the number of probability changes. The jackpot in which the number of rounds matches the actual number indicates that there is no round game to be opened short (only a round game to be opened long).

In any case, when the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. The winning symbol is selectively determined with. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, for example, 2 bytes of command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning. The stop symbol command is described, for example, in a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte among them is that the winning symbol of this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values “01H” to “0FH” of the lower byte represent the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, when "11 round probability variation symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as "B1H01H". Will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. Further, the main control CPU72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

In the three columns on the right side of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the values of the number of certainty changes, the number of shortening times, and the number of special fluctuations given after the end of the big hit game are shown.

[Number of probable changes]
In the present embodiment, when any of the probability variation symbols is applied, the probability variation number is given 10,000 times (probability variation next time). On the other hand, when any of the normal symbols is applied, the number of probability changes is not given.

[Time saving]
In the present embodiment, when the “11 round probability variation pattern 1 to 10”, the “15 round probability variation pattern 1”, the “8 round probability variation pattern”, and the “6 round probability variation pattern” are applied, the time saving number is given 10,000 times ( Probable change next time). In addition, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation pattern 11", the number of time saving is given 10 times. In this case, when the probabilistic change for 10 fluctuations (high-probability time reduction state) is completed, the latent probability change state (high-probability non-time reduction state) is entered. In addition, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation pattern 11" in the latency probability variation state, the number of time saving may be given 10,000 times (so-called latency does not continue). Furthermore, when the “11-round normal symbol” is applied, the time saving number is given 10 times. In this case, when the time saving of 10 fluctuations (low-probability time shortening state) ends, the state shifts to the normal state (low-probability non-time shortening state).

[Number of special fluctuations]
In the present embodiment, the number of special fluctuations is set when “11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11” and “11 round normal symbol” are applicable. Specifically, "1 time" is set as the number of special fluctuations in the case of "11 round probability variation pattern 1", and "2 times" as the number of special fluctuations in the case of "11 round probability variation pattern 2". "Is set, and such a setting continues until "11 round probability variation pattern 10", and if "11 round probability variation pattern 11" or "11 round normal symbol" is applied, "10 times" is set as the number of special fluctuations. Is set. In addition, when it corresponds to "15 round probability variation pattern 1", "8 round probability variation pattern", and "6 round probability variation pattern", the number of special fluctuations is not set.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
40 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol by referring to the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Even in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value “33”, “4”, “3”, “6” , “8”, “3”, “5”, “35” correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "15 round probability variation pattern 2 to 7", "3 round probability variation pattern", "5 round probability variation pattern", "5 round normal symbol" corresponding to the distribution value are shown. ing. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the proportion of "15 round certainty variation symbols 2" is 33/100 (=33%), and "15 round certainty variation symbols 4, 5" are selected. The ratios to be selected are 3/100 (=3%) respectively, and the ratio for selecting “15 round probability variation pattern 6” is 6/100 (=6%), and “15 round probability variation pattern 7” is The selection rate is 8/100 (=8%), the selection rate of "3 round probability variation pattern" is 3/100 (=3%), and "5 round probability variation pattern" is selected. The ratio to be selected is 5/100 (=5%), and the ratio to which the "5-round normal symbol" is selected is 35/100 (=35%).

If the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU72 performs the selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. To make a decision. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning. Here as well, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the MODE value and the EVENT value described above, and the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It means that. Further, the EVENT values “01H” to “09H” of the lower byte represent the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and if "15 round probability variation symbol 2" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described as "B2H01H". Become.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, it generates the stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. Further, the main control CPU72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

In the three columns on the right side of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the values of the number of certainty changes, the number of shortening times, and the number of special fluctuations given after the end of the big hit game are shown.

[Number of probable changes]
In the present embodiment, when any of the probability variation symbols is applied, the probability variation number is given 10,000 times (probability variation next time). On the other hand, when any of the normal symbols is applied, the number of probability changes is not given.

[Time saving]
In the present embodiment, if the “15 round probability variation pattern 2 to 7”, the “3 round probability variation pattern”, and the “5 round probability variation pattern” are met, the time saving number is given 10,000 times (probability variation next time). On the other hand, when the “5 round normal symbol” is applied, the time saving number is given 100 times (time saving 100 times). In this case, when the time saving of 100 fluctuations (low-probability time shortening state) ends, the state shifts to the normal state (low-probability non-time shortening state).

[Number of special fluctuations]
In this embodiment, in the case of winning with the second special symbol, the number of special fluctuations is not set.

[Refer to FIG. 34: Special symbol fluctuation preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a big hit time variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in step S2200. In addition, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of a big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of losing is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the internal lottery results in a big hit, for example, a "reach effect" is generated in the effect to perform a big hit control. Then, in the "big hit variation pattern selection table", variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of "reach effects" are defined. When the big hit is hit, one of the variation patterns is selected. It will be. It should be noted that the reach effect includes various reach effects such as normal reach effect, long reach effect, super reach effect, and the like. Basically, the reach time of the super reach production is longer than that of the reach production such as the normal reach production and the long reach production, and the expectation of winning is high. Further, at the time of winning when the time shortening function is activated, even if a variation pattern having a short variation time (a variation pattern which does not reach reach) is selected instead of a variation pattern having a long variation time, Good.

[Example of big hit variation pattern selection table]
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of a big hit time variation pattern selection table (low probability/high probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used when winning in a low-probability or high-probability non-time shortened state (variation pattern defining means). In the present embodiment, the variation patterns are not distinguished by the type of jackpot (winning symbol), but a dedicated variation pattern selection table may be used for each jackpot (hereinafter the same). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are set and stored in order from the head address, one byte each. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight stepwise different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The "variation pattern number" of "61" to "68" is assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers “61” to “66” correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are hit when the super reach effect is performed, and the fluctuation pattern numbers “67” and “68” are the reach effects (other than the super reach effect. Reach production) is performed and it corresponds to the variation pattern that becomes a hit.

The main control CPU72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201” and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the main control CPU72 selects "62" as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of a big hit variation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used when winning in a low probability time reduction state (fluctuation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are set and stored in order from the head address, one byte each. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight stepwise different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern numbers” “81” to “88” are assigned to the respective “comparison values”.

The fluctuation pattern numbers “81” to “88” all correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are hit when the reach effect is performed.

The main control CPU72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201” and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the main control CPU72 selects "82" as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an example of a big hit variation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability time reduction state (fluctuation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are set and stored in order from the head address, one byte each. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight stepwise different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern numbers” “101” to “108” are assigned to the respective “comparison values”.

The variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” all correspond to variation patterns that are hit when the reach effect is performed. It should be noted that when winning in a high probability time shortened state, a variation pattern may be set in which the win is achieved without the reach effect being performed.

The main control CPU72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201” and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the main control CPU72 selects "102" as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot variation pattern selection table (special section).
This selection table is a table used when a big hit is hit in a special section of a high probability time shortened state or a low probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means).

Here, the variation patterns at the time of a big hit in the special section of the high probability time shortened state or the low probability time shortened state are all the same variation pattern (to realize the special winning production in the treasure challenge production described later). The fluctuation time is set to, for example, about 30 seconds, and this selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation pattern 170 per non-reach).

Therefore, the main control CPU72 selects "170" as the fluctuation pattern number, regardless of the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value. The non-reach-per-special variation pattern 170 is a special variation pattern in which the variation time is fixed, and the variation time is not shortened by the number of memories.

[Refer to FIG. 34: Special symbol fluctuation preprocessing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU72, if the type of winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 (big hit stop symbol number) is "any probability variation symbol", the value of the probability variation function operation flag as the game state flag ( 01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high-probability state transition means, probability variation function activation means). Further, the main control CPU72, if the type of winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 is "any normal symbol", reset the value of the probability variation function operation flag as a game state flag (low probability state setting means , Low probability state transition means, probability state setting means).

Further, the main control CPU72, the type of winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is "any winning symbol", the main control CPU72 as a game state flag time shortening function operation flag Value (01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operation means).

In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). These stop symbol command and lottery result command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Here, similarly, the relationship between the big hit symbol random number value and the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is defined in advance in the special symbol selection table at the time of the small hit (the winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the big hit symbol random number is used to determine the winning symbol at the time of the small hit, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern when small hit]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is only one type of "two times open small hit symbol". However, other than this, for example, another type such as a "single open small hit pattern" or a "three open small hit pattern" may be prepared. As described above, the “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery does not become a trigger for the subsequent state to change to the “high probability state” or the “time reduction state”, so it is essential for this type of pachinko machine. It is possible to provide a "single opening small hit pattern" without being bound by the regulation of "two rounds (two times opening) or more".

Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a small hitting variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, and the variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal deviation can be selected.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a small hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (during a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol command and lottery result command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this processing, the main control CPU72 selects the variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (at the time of falling/at the time of hitting). In addition, the main control CPU72 sets the variation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM76. Then, the main control CPU72 generates a variation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) to the next jump destination, and returns to the special game management process.

[FIG. 33: Special symbol changing process, special symbol stop displaying process]
In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU72 loads the value of the changing timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer counter according to the passage of time (the number of clock pulse counts or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement the value of. Then, the main control CPU72 refers to the value of the timer counter, and controls the variable display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU72 sets the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) to the next jump destination.

Further, in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 34). Further, the main control CPU72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop displaying process, the main control CPU72 erases the symbol changing flag.

[Variation pattern determination process at the time of detachment]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern determination process at the time of loss. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2600: The main control CPU72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM76, and confirms whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than "0". The “variation pattern selection counter value” is a counter value managed by the main control CPU 72, and is a variable referred to when executing the special variation. The fluctuation pattern selection counter value is set in a special fluctuation number setting process (FIG. 55) described later.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S2606. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not larger than “0”, that is, when the variation pattern selection counter value is confirmed to be “0” (No), the main control is performed. The CPU 72 executes step S2602.

The case where the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” means that the special variation is executed, and the case where the variation pattern selection counter value is “0” indicates the special variation. It means not to execute.

Step S2602: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the internal state is the high probability time shortening state. The internal state can be confirmed by the probability variation function operation flag and the time reduction function operation flag (the same applies hereinafter).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortened state (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S2608. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortened state, the main control CPU72 executes step S2604.

Step S2604: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the internal state is the low probability time reduction state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time reduction state (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S2610. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortened state, the main control CPU72 executes step S2612.

Step S2606: The main control CPU72 refers to the out-of-range variation pattern selection table for the special section (FIG. 38) and executes the process of determining the variation pattern.
Step S2608: The main control CPU72 executes the process of determining the fluctuation pattern by referring to the out-of-phase fluctuation pattern selection table for the high probability time reduction state (FIG. 37).

Step S2610: The main control CPU72 executes the process of determining the variation pattern by referring to the out-of-range variation pattern selection table for the low probability time reduction state (FIG. 36).
Step S2612: The main control CPU72 executes the process of determining the fluctuation pattern by referring to the out-of-time fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 35) for the non-time shortened state (low probability/high probability non-time shortened state).
After finishing the above procedure, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol variation preprocessing (FIG. 34).

[Fluctuation pattern determination process during big hits]
FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot variation pattern determining process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2710: The main control CPU72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM76, and confirms whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than "0".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S2716. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not larger than “0”, that is, when the variation pattern selection counter value is confirmed to be “0” (No), the main control is performed. The CPU 72 executes step S2712.

Step S2712: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the internal state is the high probability time reduction state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortened state (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S2718. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortened state, the main control CPU72 executes step S2714.

Step S2714: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the internal state is the low probability time reduction state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortened state (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S2720. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortened state, the main control CPU72 executes step S2722.

Step S2716: The main control CPU72 executes the processing of determining the variation pattern by referring to the big-hit variation pattern selection table for the special section (FIG. 44).
Step S2718: The main control CPU72 executes the process of determining the variation pattern by referring to the big hitting variation pattern selection table (FIG. 43) for the high probability time reduction state.

Step S2720: The main control CPU72 executes the processing of determining the variation pattern by referring to the big hitting variation pattern selection table for the low probability time reduction state (FIG. 42).
Step S2720: The main control CPU72 refers to the big hitting variation pattern selection table (FIG. 41) for the non-time reduction state, and executes the processing for determining the variation pattern.

After finishing the above procedure, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol variation preprocessing (FIG. 34).

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of special symbol storage area shift processing. In the previous special symbol variation pre-processing, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than "0" (step S2100 in FIG. 34: Yes), the main control CPU72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the working memory corresponding to the second special symbol remains. This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 1 or more (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU72 designates the second special symbol as the special symbol of the target for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 0 (step S2210: No), the main control CPU72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol of the target for shifting the storage area. To do. The designation in this case is performed by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value, for example.

Step S2216: The main control CPU72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM76 for the special symbol of the object designated in either the above step S2212 or step S2214. The specific contents of the processing are as described above in the special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol (-1).

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the "variation start time operation memory number" from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Note that, here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the working memory counter may be added and then the "variation start time working memory number" may be set.

Step S2222: Also, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area this time is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the working memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a command having a length of one word, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-described "effect command for increasing working memory number". That is, the effect command when the number of operating memories decreases is the value of the lower byte (for example, “00H” to “03H”) that indicates the number of operating memories after the reduction, with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper byte that indicates the command type. )) is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logical sum) with an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “reduction in the number of working memory due to consumption”. Therefore, with respect to the lower byte, the second place of the addition value "10H" is logically ORed to become "1", and this value represents "the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". Will be things. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time "4" (command notation is "14H") is decreased by 1, and the number of working memories this time is "3" (command The notation is "13H". Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of decreasing the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation "13H" to "11H") up to the previous one by one. , That the number of working memories this time has become “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is the operation memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: In addition, when the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU72 sets the working memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU72 executes effect command output processing. This process is for transmitting the effect memory time reduction effect command set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol variation preprocessing (FIG. 34).

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol stop displaying process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended, based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU72 determines that the stop display time has not ended yet (No). In this case, the main control CPU72 returns to the special game management process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 33) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop displaying process.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU72 next executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. Further, the main control CPU72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the big hit flag is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "the big winning variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time shortened state.

Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU72 sets "start big job (big hit game)" as an internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of big hit symbol. For example, when the type of big hit is "15 round big hit", a value corresponding to "15 round" is set in the continuous operation number status. When the type of big hit is "3 round big hit", a value representing "3 round" is set in the continuous operation number status. Further, the main control CPU72 generates a state command indicating that the big hit. The state command indicating that the big hit is being transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of the big hit symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 34). For example, when the type of big hit is "15 round big hit", the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing "15 round". When the jackpot type is “3 round jackpot”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “3 round”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of a big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process.

[When not elected]
On the other hand, in the case other than the time of big hit, the following procedure is executed.
That is, if the main control CPU72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), then it executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU72 then confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the small hit flag is set. Then, if the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and it is simply a deviation (No), the main control CPU72 next executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU72 sets the address of the special symbol variation preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the address of the small winning combination variable winning device management processing as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the "small hit start (in the small hit)" as the internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit. The state command indicating that the small hit is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

Step S4608: the main control CPU72 executes a special variation management process. Specifically, the main control CPU72 executes a process of managing the special fluctuation that is executed after the jackpot game is over. The details of the special variation management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU72 loads the value of the frequency cut counter. The "counting counter" has respective counter values set in the probability variation count area and the time saving count area of the RAM 76 in the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state". It should be noted that although the number of times cut is set here, the value of the number of times cut counter in the “high probability state” can be set to an extremely huge value (for example, 10,000 times or more). By setting such an enormous value, it is possible to stochastically guarantee that the "high probability state" continues until the next winning is substantially obtained. In addition, a value (for example, 10 times, 100 times, 10000 times, etc.) according to the winning symbol is set in the number-of-times cutting counter related to the “time reduction state”.

Step S4620: The main control CPU72 confirms whether the loaded counter value is 0 or not. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU72 returns to the special game management process. On the other hand, if the number of times cut counter value is not 0 (No), the number of times cut counter value command is generated, and then the main control CPU72 executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU72 decrements (counts by 1) the value of the number of times cut counter.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the frequency cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. On the other hand, when the value of the frequency cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU72 resets the flag when the multi-cutting function is activated. It is the probability variation function operation flag or the time reduction function operation flag that is reset, but since the value of the cut-off counter that counts the high probability state in the “high probability state” does not practically become 0, It is the time reduction function operation flag that is actually reset. As a result, the time-reduced state and the high-probability state end after the stop display of the special symbol. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special game management process.

[Special fluctuation management processing]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special variation management process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4660: The main control CPU72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM76, and confirms whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than "0".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S4662. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not larger than "0", that is, when the variation pattern selection counter value is "0" (No), the main control CPU72 is a special symbol. The process returns to the process during stop display (FIG. 48).

Step S4662: The main control CPU72 executes a process of decrementing (decreasing by 1) the fluctuation pattern selection counter value. As a result, the number of times the special fluctuation is executed (the number of times the special fluctuation can be executed) is reduced by one.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol stop displaying process (FIG. 48).

[Variable winning device management processing during big hits]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management processing at the time of big hit.
Big winning variable winning device management processing, big winning game process selection processing (step S5100), big winning big winning opening pattern setting processing (step S5200), big winning big winning opening and closing operation processing (step S5300), big winning big This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a winning opening closing process (step S5400) and a big hit end process (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the big hit game process selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot variable winning device management process as the return address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening/closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the jackpot special winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU72 selects the jackpot special winning opening/closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the jackpot large winning opening/closing operation. If the operation processing has been completed, the big winning opening special winning opening closing processing (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big winning opening big winning opening opening/closing processing and the big winning opening big winning opening closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (round number), the main control CPU 72 ends the big hitting processing as the next jump destination ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each processing will be described in more detail.

[Prize winning opening pattern setting process when jackpot]
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a big winning opening special opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened/closed and the time of each opening during a big hit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5204: The main control CPU72 executes a symbol-specific open pattern setting process. In this processing, the main control CPU72, according to the winning symbol of this time, the opening pattern of the special winning opening (the number of times of opening of each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, the number of counts in one round (maximum Set the number of winnings), opening time, ending time, etc. Note that the number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is basically about 10, but there is almost no winning during opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). Not very difficult).

Step S5206: The main control CPU72 sets the number of execution rounds in the big hit game of this time, based on the big hit winning symbol selected in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 34). Specifically, if "15 round big hit" is selected as the type of big hit, the main control CPU72 sets the number of execution rounds to 15. If "3 round big hit" is selected as the type of big hit, the main control CPU72 sets the number of execution rounds to 3. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76.

Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The value of the timer set here becomes the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. If 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit opening timer, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing control) that a ball can easily enter the special winning opening during one opening. It is a time for which 10 or more game balls are fired by the board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if the value of the timer is set to 0.1 seconds, the opening time is a short time that will hardly occur (becomes difficult) even if it is not possible to enter the big winning opening during one opening (For example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between the game balls shot by the launch control board set 174).

Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the special winning opening interval timer based on the special winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The value of the timer set here becomes the waiting time between rounds during a big hit.

Step S5212: When the above procedure is finished, the main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening big winning opening opening/closing operation process, and returns to the big winning variable winning device management processing (FIG. 50).

[Big prize opening/closing operation processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a special winning opening opening/closing operation process during a big hit. This process is for controlling the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5301: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the special winning opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special winning opening interval timer is counting down by checking whether or not the special winning opening interval timer set in step S5314 below is already in operation. it can.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the special winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the special winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302: The main control CPU72 opens the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is generated based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

When the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening is opened, the main control CPU72 generates a first big winning opening opening command or a second big winning opening opening command. The first special winning opening opening command and the second special winning opening opening command are transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a release timer countdown process. In this processing, the countdown of the opening timer set in the above-mentioned big winning opening opening pattern setting processing (step S5208 in FIG. 51) is executed.

Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the special winning opening opening time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU72 then proceeds to step S5308. To execute.

Step S5308: The main control CPU72 executes a winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). The predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) allowed per opening (one round of the big hit) as described above. If the number of counts has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process. When the big winning variable winning device management process is executed next time, the main control CPU72 executes the procedure of the above steps S5301 to S5310 because the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing process at the present stage at this stage. Execute repeatedly.

When it is determined in step S5306 that the special winning opening opening time has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count number has reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S5312. Execute.

Step S5312: The main control CPU72 closes the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening. Specifically, the generation of the drive signal to be applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is terminated. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

When the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening is closed, the main control CPU 72 generates a first special winning opening closing command or a second special winning opening closing command. The first special winning opening closing command and the second special winning opening closing command are transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this processing, the main control CPU72 executes the countdown of the special winning opening interval timer set in the above-described big winning opening special opening opening pattern setting processing (step S5210 in FIG. 51).

Step S5315: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the special winning opening interval time is over. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the special winning opening interval timer is not equal to or less than 0 (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management processing at the time of big hit (FIG. 50). Then, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of big hit is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the first step S5301 and directly executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the special winning opening interval timer after the countdown processing has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU72 increments the value of the opening number counter. The value of the opening counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

Step S5320: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the release number counter after increment has reached the number set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is judged is, for example, "to open the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 multiple times in one round during a big hit". This is to correspond to the opening pattern.

When the pattern of repeating the opening/closing operation a plurality of times in one round is not adopted, the “number of times set in the current round” in each round is set to once in each round. Therefore, in each round, since the counter value reaches the set number of times by one opening/closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S5322.

On the other hand, when the pattern in which the opening/closing operation is repeated a plurality of times in one round is adopted, the counter value has not yet reached the set number at the end of one opening (No).

In this case, when the main control CPU72 returns to the big winning variable winning device management processing, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation processing at the present stage, so the procedure from step S5301 to step S5320 is performed. Execute repeatedly. As a result, in step S5318, the increment of the opening number counter proceeds, and when the counter value reaches the set number (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S5322.

Step S5322: The main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process at the time of big hit, and returns to the variable winning device managing process at big hit. Then, when the big winning time variable winning device management processing is executed next, the main control CPU72 next executes the big winning opening closing processing.

[Large winning prize closing process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a special winning opening closing process at the time of a big hit. The big winning opening closing process at the time of big hit is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, or for ending the operation thereof. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5402: The main control CPU72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter becomes "1" at the stage of finishing the first round and proceeding to the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the incremented round number counter has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the incremented round number counter, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after subtraction) (No). Then, step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU72 generates a round number command from the current value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process. The production control device 124 can confirm the current round number based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU72 next executes the big hit time variable winning device management processing, the main control CPU72 in the big hit game process selection processing (step S5100 in FIG. 50), the big hit time big winning opening opening/closing processing which is the next jump destination. To execute. After execution of the big winning opening opening/closing operation processing, the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening closing processing again after the big winning opening closing processing is executed, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are executed. Execute repeatedly. As a result, the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (15 times, etc.).

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, the main control CPU72 resets the round number counter (=0), and sets the next jump destination to the big hit end processing.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU72 next executes the big winning time variable winning device management processing, this time the big winning time ending processing is selected.

[End processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big hit end processing. This big hit end processing is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit. Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure.

Step S5501: The main control CPU72 executes the big hit end time timer countdown processing. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (every time this module is called) as time elapses.

Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU72 terminates this module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management processing (FIG. 50).

After that, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU72 determines that the jackpot end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and thereafter.

Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU72. Further, the main control CPU72 erases "big hit" from the internal state flag here and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit time other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 34) during the previous special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times). The value of the set number of times of probability variation is stored in, for example, the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76, and becomes the above-mentioned number-of-times cut counter value. The number of times of probability variation set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) will be performed in a high probability state in subsequent games. However, if a huge number of 10,000 times is set as described above, there is almost no probability that non-wins will continue up to that point (the winning probability at high probability is, for example, 1/32 to 1/100). Degree), in effect, the high probability state will continue until the next election. On the contrary, when a practical upper limit is set in the high probability state, the probability fluctuation frequency is set to a realistic frequency (for example, about 70 times) (so-called frequency change probability). If the value of the probability variation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU72 does not execute step S5508.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the time reduction function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit time other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 34) during the previous special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 10 times, 100 times or 10000 times). The value of the set hour/hour count is stored in the hour/hour count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times saved here is the upper limit number for shortening the variation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU72 does not execute step S5512.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, with the reset of the big hit flag or the end of the big role, a state designation command representing "normal" is generated as the game state. If the probability variation function operation flag is set, a state designation command representing "high probability middle" is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function operation flag is set, the state reduction is "time reduction in progress". Is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

Step S5515: The main control CPU72 executes a special variation number setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU72 executes a process of setting a variation pattern selection counter value based on the type of winning symbol. The details of the special variation number setting process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S5516: After going through the above procedure, the main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 33) in the special game management process to the special symbol variation preprocess. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process.

[Special fluctuation number setting process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special variation number setting process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5600: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the winning this time corresponds to any of "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbol".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the winning of this time corresponds to either “11th round probability variation symbol 1 to 11” or “11th round normal symbol” (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S5602. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the winning this time corresponds to either “11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11” or “11 round normal symbol”, the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot end process (FIG. 54). Return.

Step S5602: The main control CPU72 sets a value corresponding to the winning symbol in the variation pattern selection counter value. The value according to the winning symbol is set according to the value of the number of special fluctuations in FIG. As a result, after the jackpot game is over, the special variation is executed once to ten times. The set variation pattern selection counter value is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol is stopped and displayed once. Then, through such processing, the main control CPU72 can make the selected variation pattern a normal variation or a special variation.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU72 returns to the jackpot end processing (FIG. 54).

[Variable winning device management processing during small hits]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management processing at the time of a small hit.
The variable winning a prize device management process at the time of a small hit is a game process selection process at the time of a small hit (step S6100), a large winning a prize opening pattern setting process at a small hit (step S6200), and a large winning a prize opening/closing process at a small hit (step S6300). , The small winning big winning opening closing process (step S6400) and the small winning end process (step S6500) are included.

Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the variable winning device management processing at the time of small hits as the return address in the stack pointer. .. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening/closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not been started yet, the main control CPU72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening/closing process (step S6300) as the next jump destination, and the small winning large If the winning opening opening/closing operation processing is completed, the small winning big winning opening closing processing (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small winning big winning opening opening/closing processing and the small winning large winning opening closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set number of consecutive operations, the main control CPU 72 determines the small hitting end processing (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each processing will be described in more detail.

[Prize winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. This processing is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 is opened/closed and the time of each opening during a small hit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S6212: The main control CPU72 sets the "small hitting open pattern". In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hitting opening pattern”, for example, the opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time, respectively. Since there is no concept of “round” for “small hit”, the “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” or “second open”.

Step S6214: The main control CPU72 sets the number of times of opening the special winning opening to, for example, two times, based on the special winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76.

Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU72 sets the small hit opening timer. The value of the timer set here is the opening time per operation when activating the first variable winning device 30. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of the small hit opening timer is set to 0.1 seconds, and such a releasing time almost wins the big winning opening during one opening. It does not occur (becomes difficult) for a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the interval at which game balls are shot by the launcher unit).

Step S6218: The main control CPU72 sets the small hit time interval timer. The value of the timer set here is a waiting time for each opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 a plurality of times during a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the small hit, and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the small hit (FIG. 56). Then, the main control CPU72 executes a small winning big winning opening opening and closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening opening/closing operation processing for small hits]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of a small hit. This process is for controlling the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. The procedure will be described below.

Step S6301: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by checking whether or not the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already operating, it is possible to check whether or not the interval timer is counting down.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302: The main control CPU72 opens the first special winning opening. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is generated. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU72 executes a release timer countdown process. In this process, a countdown of the opening timer set in the previous small hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 57) is executed.

Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU72 then proceeds to step S6308. To execute.

Step S6308: The main control CPU72 executes a winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 (the first big winning opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) allowed per one opening (one opening at the time of a small hit) as described above. If the number of counts has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU72 returns to the small-winning variable winning device management process (FIG. 56). When the small hitting variable winning device management processing is executed next time, the jump destination is set to the small winning opening special winning opening opening/closing operation processing at this stage, so the main control CPU72 executes the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the procedure.

When it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count number has reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU72 next executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the opening timer is set to a short time for the opening at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU72 normally performs the step before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has expired.

Step S6312: The main control CPU72 closes the first special winning opening. Specifically, the generation of the drive signal to be applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is ended. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the above-mentioned small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 57).

Step S6315: the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown processing is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable at the time of small hit. It returns to the end address of the winning device management processing (FIG. 56). Then, when the small winning big winning opening opening/closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from step S6301 at the beginning and directly executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316: The main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening closing process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device managing process. Then, when the small winning variable winning a prize device management process is executed next, the main control CPU72 next executes a small winning big winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process when small hit]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. The small winning big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or for ending the operation thereof. The procedure will be described below.

Step S6412: The main control CPU72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the incremented release number counter has reached the set release number. The number of times of opening is set in the previous special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 57). If the value of the opening counter does not reach the set opening number (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of small hit.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the variable winning device management processing at the time of small hit (FIG. 56).

When the main control CPU72 next executes the variable winning device management processing, the main control CPU72 in the small hitting game process selection processing (step S6100 in FIG. 56), the main winning CPU opening/closing operation processing at the time of the next jump destination. To execute. Then, after executing the small winning big winning opening opening/closing operation process, the main control CPU72 executes again the small winning large winning opening closing process until the actual opening number reaches the set opening number (two times). The opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S6418.

Steps S6418, S6420: In this case, the main control CPU72 resets the opening number counter (=0), and sets the next jump destination to the small hitting end processing.

Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the variable winning device management processing at the time of small hit (FIG. 56). As a result, when the main control CPU72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hitting end process is selected this time.

[End processing for small hits]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the end processing at the time of small hit. This small hitting end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 during the small hit. Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure.

Step S6502: The main control CPU72 executes a small hitting end time timer countdown process. In this processing, the main control CPU72 sets an initial value in the small hitting end time timer, and then counts down the timer (every time this module is called) with the lapse of time.

Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the small hitting end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hitting end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU72 determines that the small hitting end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU72 terminates this module and returns to the variable winning device management processing at the time of small hit (FIG. 56).

After that, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 with the lapse of time, the main control CPU72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and erases "in small hit" from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. In the case of a big hit, the internal condition device operates (for example, although the flag corresponding to the condition device is turned on), but in the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not particularly operate. The procedure is simply for clearing the flag.

Step S6510: After going through the above procedure, the main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of small hit.

Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 33) in the special game management process to the special symbol variation preprocess. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU72 returns to the small winning variable winning device management process.

[LED display setting process]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the LED display setting process.
LED display setting process, special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), operation memory display setting process (step S1230), continuous operation number display setting This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210) and the working memory display setting process (step S1230), the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, ordinary In the process of generating a drive signal (common output data) to be applied to each LED of the symbol display device 33, the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a. is there. The generated common output data (display data) is stored in the RAM of the use area and is output in the dynamic port output processing (the same applies hereinafter).

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating a drive signal (common output data) to be applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU72 controls lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38d and the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the value of the probability variation function operation flag or the time reduction function operation flag, respectively. For example, if the probability variation function operation flag is set to a value (01H) when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 causes the main control CPU72 to turn on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d (common output data). To generate. The probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to be lit until the big hit game regarding the special symbol is started, or until the probability variation function is turned off after the variation display of the special symbol is performed a prescribed number of times, and then non- The display can be switched (turned off). Further, the probability variation state display lamp 38d does not light up when the latent probability variation state (high-probability non-time shortening state) is entered, but the power source is cut off in the latent probability variation state and the power is not cleared without clearing the RAM. Lights when restored. On the other hand, when the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU72 causes the main control CPU72 to turn on the lighting signal (common) for the LED corresponding to the time saving state display lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Output data) is generated. Further, the main control CPU72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f according to the firing position designation status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game (when the firing position designation status is set to "1"), the main control CPU 72 fires. A lighting signal (common output data) for the LED corresponding to the position designation lamp 38f is generated. On the other hand, when the game is in the normal game in the low probability non-time shortened state (when the launch position designation status is set to “0”), the main control CPU 72 causes the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f ( Data for common output) is not generated. Further, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU72, in addition to the above-mentioned time saving state display lamp 38e, the lighting signal (for common output) to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. Data). In addition, when shifting to the "time reduction state" after the big hit game, the firing position designation lamp 38f lights up from the start of the big hit game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. OFF).

The probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d can employ any of the following lighting methods.
(1) The first lighting method is mainly used for models equipped with the latent probability variation function. It does not light even in the probability variation state (high probability state), and it is the probability variation state when the power is turned on. It is a method to turn on the light. For example, when the latent probability variation state exists, when the latent probability variation state is entered, the probability variation state display lamp 38d can be turned off, and it is lit during the probability variation (high probability time reduction state). You can choose not to.
(2) The second lighting method is a method mainly used for a model that does not have a latent probability changing function, and is a lighting method in which the lighting is turned on in a probability variation state.
Either of these lighting methods can be adopted depending on the specifications of the model of the game machine and the like.

Further, the main control CPU72 controls the turning on of the big hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU72 generates a lighting signal (common output data) for the big hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c based on the value of the continuous operation number status. At this time, the target of outputting the lighting signal is a combination of the display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c corresponding to the big hit symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation number status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "15 rounds", the main control CPU 72 causes all the lamps (for example, all the display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c) corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "15 rounds". A lighting signal (common output data) for the lamp is generated. Further, if the value of the continuous operation number status specifies "3 rounds", the main control CPU72 causes the main control CPU72 to generate a lighting signal (common output) for the lamp (for example, only the lamp 38a) corresponding to the lighting pattern indicating "3 rounds". Data) is generated. Since the three display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c can display six types of lighting patterns, it is possible to correspond to the six types of big hits of the present embodiment. The details of the lighting pattern corresponding to the number of rounds are preferably displayed around the display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c in order to clearly convey them to the player.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a first procedure example of the addition number calculation process. Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure.

Step S602: The main control CPU72 executes processing for clearing the normal prize ball addition number, the normal out addition number, and the total out addition number.
The normal prize ball addition number is a variable indicating a value to be added to the normal prize ball number. The normal out addition number is a variable indicating a value to be added to the normal out number. The total out addition number is a variable indicating a value to be added to the total out number.

Step S604: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the detection signal is input from the out switch 99.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal has been input (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S606. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the detection signal has been input (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S608.

Step S606: The main control CPU72 executes a process of adding 1 to the total out addition number. For example, when the value of the total out addition number is “0”, the value of the total out addition number is “1”.

Step S608: The main control CPU72 executes the process of loading the special game management phase. The value of the special game management phase will be described later.

Step S610: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not it is a big hit. Whether or not it is in the big hit can be confirmed by the value of the special game management phase (big hit: special game management phase = "03H" to "07H").

As a result, when it is confirmed that the big hit is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the big hit is in progress (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S612.

Step S612: The main control CPU72 confirms whether it is during time saving. Whether or not the time is being shortened can be confirmed by the time reduction function operation flag.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the time is shortening (Yes), the main control CPU72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the time is shortening (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S614.

Step S614: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not right-handing is instructed. Whether or not right-handing is instructed can be confirmed by the firing position designation status.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the right-handing is instructed (Yes), the main control CPU72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the right-handing instruction is being issued (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S616.

By executing the processing of step S614, the main control CPU72 can determine whether or not to calculate the base based on the content of the firing position designation status (based on the determination content by the firing position determination means). (Base calculation executability determining means).

Further, by executing the processing of step S610 to step S614, the main control CPU72 should not be in the midst of executing the big hit game, in the time shortened state, or to shoot the game ball to the second game area. If either of the cases is determined to be present, it can be determined not to calculate the base (base calculation executability determining means).

Further, by executing the processing of step S610 to step S614, the main control CPU72 should not shoot the big hit game, in the non-time shortened state, or shoot the game ball in the first game area. If either of the cases is determined to be present, it can be determined to calculate the base (base calculation executability determining means).

Step S616: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the detection signal is input from the out switch 99.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal has been input (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S618. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the detection signal has been input (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S620.

Step S618: The main control CPU72 executes the process of adding 1 to the normal out addition number. For example, when the value of the normal out addition number is “0”, the value of the normal out addition number is “1”.

Step S620: Whether the main control CPU72 has input a detection signal from each winning opening switch (for example, a middle starting winning opening switch 80, a right starting winning opening switch 82, a first winning opening switch 86, a second winning opening switch 81). Confirm whether or not.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal is input (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S622. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the detection signal has been input (No), the main control CPU72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

Step S622: The main control CPU72 executes a process of adding all the prize sphere numbers generated in this interruption to the normal prize sphere addition number.
For example, the value of the normal out addition number is “0”, and at this interruption, the medium starting winning opening 26 (medium starting winning opening switch 80: number of prize balls=4), the right starting winning opening 28a (right starting winning) Mouth switch 82: Number of prize balls = 1), Ordinary winning a prize port 22 (first prize hole switch 86: Number of prize balls = 3) When one game ball enters each, the value of the normal out addition number Is “8 (=4+1+3)”. The switch and the number of prize balls to be awarded are determined based on the prize ball number data stored in the use area. Since the switch and the number of prize balls to be awarded may differ depending on the model, this process is a model-dependent process.

Upon completion of the above processing, the main control CPU72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a second procedure example of the addition number calculation process. Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure. Either one of the procedure examples can be adopted as the first procedure example and the second procedure example.

Step S630: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the detection signal is inputted from the out switch 99.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal is input from the out switch 99 (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S631. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the detection signal is input from the out switch 99 (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S632.

Step S631: When confirming that the detection signal is input from the out switch 99, the main control CPU72 sets "1" to the number of shot balls B (total number of out additions).

Step S632: When the main control CPU72 cannot confirm that the detection signal is input from the out switch 99, it sets the number of shot balls B (total out number added) to "0".

Step S633: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the game state is a specific game state. The reason for determining whether or not the game state is the specific game state is that the number A of shot balls and the number of acquired balls, which are the basis of the base calculation, are not counted in the specific game state.

Here, the specific game state can include at least one state of (1) during a big hit, (2) during saving time, and (3) during right-handing instruction. Further, the reason for including "(3) right-handing instruction in progress" is that in a specific gaming state "during a small hit rush state (while adopting the simultaneous turning of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the second This is because the state in which small hits frequently occur due to fluctuations in special symbols, that is, the high probability non-time shortened state) is included, and the latent latency change (during high probability non-time shortened state) is not included. ..

As a result, when it is confirmed that the game state is the specific game state (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S634. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the game state is the specific game state (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S635.

Step S634: The main control CPU72 executes a process of setting the number A of shot balls (normal out addition number) to "0" and the acquired number of balls (normal prize ball addition number) to "0". Then, upon completion of this processing, the main control CPU72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

Step S635: The main control CPU72 executes a process of copying (substituting) the value of the number of shot balls B (total number of out additions) to the number of shot balls A (number of normal out additions).

Step S636: The main control CPU72 executes a process of setting the total number of prize balls by the game balls that have won the winning opening to the number of acquired balls (normal prize ball addition number). The switch and the number of prize balls to be awarded are determined based on the prize ball number data stored in the use area. Since the switch and the number of prize balls to be awarded may differ depending on the model, this process is a model-dependent process.
Here, for the big prize hole, since it is excluded from the base calculation in the big hit, it is not necessary to calculate the number of prize balls, but if you want to include the number of prize balls in the normal small hit in the base Can calculate the number of prize balls for the special winning opening.

The “number of acquired balls”, “the number of shot balls A”, and “the number of shot balls B” are all variables stored in the use area of the RAM 76.
Then, upon completion of this processing, the main control CPU72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the number of shot balls.
When the "gaming state" is "big hit", "time saving" or "right-handing instruction", the value of the number of shot balls is as follows.

At the time of "out switch detection", the "number of shot balls A" is "0", and the "number of shot balls B" is "1".
When "out switch is not detected", "the number of shot balls A" is "0" and "the number of shot balls B" is "0".

When the "game state" is "in normal operation" or "in latent state (probability change state of latent state)", the value of the number of shot balls is the following value.

At the “out switch detection time”, the “number of shot balls A” is “1” and the “number of shot balls B” is “1”.
When "out switch is not detected", "the number of shot balls A" is "0" and "the number of shot balls B" is "0".

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of performance display monitor control processing. Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure.

Step S640: The main control CPU72 executes processing to save the stack pointer and all registers.

Step S642: The main control CPU72 executes the out-of-area RAM clear check processing. This processing is processing outside the area. Specifically, the main control CPU72 determines whether or not the RAM used outside the area has been initialized, and if it has not been initialized, executes the processing for initialization.

Step S643: The main control CPU72 confirms whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H” or “03H”.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S648. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S644.

By executing such a process, it is possible to prevent the original process related to the performance display monitor 200 from being executed when the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to, like the process outside the area called in the main loop. it can.

The game can be stopped during the setting change or the setting reference. In this case, the original process related to the performance display monitor 200 is not performed. For this reason, it is possible to say that "the processing outside the area is not called while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to." In other words, the code amount of the used area can be reduced by executing the processing for determining whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to outside the area. As described above, the load of the main program can be reduced by not executing the process related to the performance display monitor 200 during the setting change or the setting reference.

Step S644: The main control CPU72 executes the ball number addition processing. This processing is processing outside the area. Specifically, the main control CPU72, the number of shot balls A (normal out addition number) calculated by the "addition number calculation process" executed as the processing of the use area, the number of shot balls B (total out addition number) and acquisition A process of adding the number of balls (the number of normal prize balls added) to various counters arranged outside the area of the RAM 76 is executed.

Specifically, the main control CPU 72 performs a process of adding the number of shot balls A (the number of normal out additions) to the number of normal outs (normal out counter), and the number of shot balls B (total out) to the total number of outs (total out counter). A process of adding the number of additions, a process of adding the number of acquired balls (the number of additions of normal prize balls) to the number of normal prize balls (counter of normal prize balls), and the like are executed. The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S646: The main control CPU72 executes performance display monitor display processing. This processing is processing outside the area. Specifically, the main control CPU72 performs blinking of the performance display monitor 200, change of display contents, and setting of display data. The display content is changed, for example, by repeating "lighting for 0.3 seconds, lighting for 0.3 seconds, or turning off (when blinking)" eight times (when a total of 4.8 seconds has elapsed). The contents to be switched are the “base currently being measured” and the “base of the section for the last 60,000 shots”.

Then, the start of the division task (division processing) is set at the timing of turning on or off for the eighth time (when 4.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of display). Thereafter, the division task is executed through the performance display monitor total division process called from the main loop process. The calculation in the division task is a process that ends at the latest when the display content is changed (4.8 seconds after the display starts and 0.3 seconds after the division task starts).

Further, in this process, the main control CPU72 executes a process of generating common output data for controlling lighting of the LED included in the performance display monitor 200 based on the value of the base.

For example, when "the base of the current section is 30%", the main control CPU72 sets the data corresponding to "bL." as the common output data (display data) in the common 0, 1 buffer, and the common 2 , 3 buffer is set to the data corresponding to “30” as the common output data (display data).

Step S648: The main control CPU72 executes a process of restoring the stack pointer and all registers.
Upon completion of the above processing, the main control CPU72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sphere count addition process.
The sphere number addition process is a process outside the area. The sphere number addition process is called by the performance display monitor control process called by the timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure.

Step S650: The main control CPU72 executes a process of adding the number of acquired balls (the number of added normal prize balls) to the number of normal prize balls counter (the number of normal prize balls). For example, when the value of the normal prize ball number counter is "100" and the value of the acquired ball number is "8", the value of the normal prize ball number counter is "108".

Step S652: The main control CPU72 executes a process of adding the number A of shot balls (the number of additions of normal out) to the normal out counter (number of normal outs). For example, when the value of the normal out counter is "299" and the value of the number A of shot balls is "0", the value of the normal out counter is "299".

Step S654: The main control CPU72 executes a process of adding the number of shot balls B (total number of outs) to the total out counter (total number of outs). For example, when the value of the total out counter is "299" and the value of the number of shot balls B is "1", the value of the total out counter is "300".

The "normal prize ball number counter", the "normal out counter", and the "total out counter" are variables stored in the RAM outside the area.
The values of the "normal prize ball number counter" and the "normal out counter" are used for the base calculation, and the value of the "total out counter" is used for updating the total section.
Upon completion of the above processing, the main control CPU72 returns to the performance display monitor control processing (FIG. 65).

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the performance display monitor total division processing.
The performance display monitor total division processing is processing outside the area. The performance display monitor total division process is called from the main loop process.

Step S660: The main control CPU72 executes processing to save the stack pointer and all registers.

Step S661: The main control CPU72 executes the outside RAM clear check process. This processing is processing outside the area. Specifically, the main control CPU72 determines whether or not the RAM used outside the area has been initialized, and if it has not been initialized, executes the processing for initialization.

Step S662a: The main control CPU72 confirms whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H” or “03H”.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S668. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S663.

The game can be stopped during the setting change or the setting reference. In this case, the original process related to the performance display monitor 200 is not performed. For this reason, it is possible to say that "the processing outside the area is not called while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to." In other words, the code amount of the used area can be reduced by executing the processing for determining whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to outside the area. As described above, the load of the main program can be reduced by not executing the process related to the performance display monitor 200 during the setting change or the setting reference.

In the game stopped state, a "game stop flag", which is installed in a so-called two-type model (game machine having a specific area), is also adopted in the one-type model, and the game is being changed while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to. It can be moved by setting the stop flag.

Step S663: The main control CPU72 determines whether or not it is a section change (whether the section for displaying the base has moved to a new section), that is, the value of the total out number (total out counter) is 60000. Is multiplied by n (integer) and 300 is added, and it is confirmed whether or not the value is larger than the value. Note that n is a value indicating the current section, and 1 is set as an initial value.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the section is changed (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S664. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the section is changed (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S666.

Step S664: The main control CPU72 executes a process of storing the value of the normal prize ball number (normal prize ball number counter) and the value of the normal out number (normal out counter) in the dedicated buffer.
Further, the main control CPU72 executes a process of adding 1 to the value n indicating the current section and updating the value.

In this process, it is preferable not to save the base value. The reason for this is that when the total number of outs reaches a certain value (60,000) and the base display section is switched, "the number of regular prize balls / the number of regular outs x 100 is rounded off" is calculated and the result is saved. Although it is possible to do so, it takes too much time for the main control CPU 72 to perform this calculation. Therefore, in the present process, the optimum calculation method is to perform only the process of saving the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal outs, and to perform the calculation at an appropriate timing later. This is a calculation method based on the idea of “shortening the processing time in the worst case”, and is an important matter for stabilizing the operation of a gaming machine, particularly a pachinko machine. However, in this process, the main control CPU72 executes a process of storing the base value (for example, a process of storing the base value calculated in step S667 described later as the base value of the previous section). Good.

Step S665: The main control CPU72 executes processing for clearing the value of the number of normal prize balls and the value of the number of normal outs.
When this process ends, the main control CPU72 next executes the process of step S668.

Step S666: The main control CPU72 executes the process of calculating the start address of the division task. By executing this processing, the main control CPU 72 can execute an operation for calculating the base in the division task (processing such as division and subtraction) by a predetermined processing amount (for example, 1 bit).

As described above, since it takes time to execute the division process by the main control CPU 72, the division process is executed several times in this embodiment.
Specifically, by preparing a table in which the following start addresses are stored, calculating the start address of the module to be executed this time, and setting that address in the program counter (PC), the division process is performed a little. They are executed one by one (divided into pieces).

(1) Standby processing before division execution (start address)
(2) Division preparation process (starting address)
(3) Process for obtaining the 64th place of the quotient (the leading address of the)
(4) Process for obtaining the 32nd place of the quotient (the leading address of the)
(5) Process for obtaining the 16th place of the quotient (starting address)
(6) Processing for obtaining the 8th place of the quotient (the leading address of)
(7) Processing for obtaining the 4th place of the quotient (starting address)
(8) Processing for obtaining the second digit of the quotient (the leading address of)
(9) Processing for obtaining the ones digit of the quotient (the leading address of)
(10) Rounding processing (start address)
(11) Standby processing after division (start address)
For example, the “waiting process before execution of division” in (1) above is executed when “0” is set in the next task (next task determination status), and the “preparation for division process” in (2) above. Is executed when "1" is set for the next task. By such control processing, the contents of the following division tasks can be executed little by little. The initial value of the next task is 0.

Step S667: The main control CPU72 executes a process of executing (calling) the division task. This processing is processing outside the area. The division task includes 11 tasks (division task 0 to division task 10), and division tasks 0 to 10 are sequentially called. The contents of the division task will be described later.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU72 executes a process of calculating a base displayed on the performance display monitor 200 (base related process) as a process included in the process outside the area (second process). It is possible (second processing execution means). Note that the base-related processing includes at least one of the processing required to calculate the base and the processing required to display the base.

Step S668: The main control CPU72 executes a process of restoring the stack pointer and all registers.
Upon completion of the above processing, the main control CPU72 returns to the main loop processing (FIG. 16).

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of processing of division task 1.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of processing of division tasks 2 to 8.
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of processing of the division task 9.
There are 0 to 10 division tasks, the value of the next task is referred to in the process of calculating the start address of the division task (S666), and the start address of the division task to be actually executed is designated. Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure.

Here, the content of the processing of the division task described below is explained by an example in which the calculation for calculating the base is performed bit by bit by one call, but the calculation for calculating the base by one call is completed. You may let me.

After the completion of the base calculation, it may be possible to monitor whether the RAM value outside the area is abnormal. The start of the division task (start of the base calculation) may be set in the performance display monitor display process.

If "0" is set in the next task, the division task 0 is executed. Although the content of the division task 0 is not shown in the figure, the standby process before the division is executed. In the final processing of the division task 0, "1" is set in the next task.

When "1" is set in the next task, the division task 1 shown in FIG. 68 is executed.
The flow of processing of division task 1 will be described below.

Step S730: The main control CPU72 initializes the integer (variable) to “128 (2×64)” and executes the process of saving “128” in the integer buffer.

Step S732: The main control CPU72 loads the value of the normal out number, multiplies the loaded value of the normal out number by an integer "128", and saves the multiplied value as a divisor in the divisor buffer.

Step S734: The main control CPU72 loads the value of the number of normal prize balls, multiplies the loaded value of the number of normal prize balls by "2" and "100", and saves the multiplied value as a dividend in the dividend buffer. To execute.

Step S736: The main control CPU72 initializes the quotient to "0", and executes processing to save "0" in the quotient buffer.

Step S738: The main control CPU72 sets "2" to the next task.

Upon completion of the above processing, the main control CPU72 returns to the performance display monitor total division processing (FIG. 67).

When “2” to “8” are set in the next task, the division tasks 2 to 8 shown in FIG. 69 are executed.
The processing flow of the division tasks 2 to 8 will be described below.

Step S740: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the dividend saved in the dividend buffer is greater than or equal to the divisor saved in the divisor buffer.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the dividend saved in the dividend buffer is greater than or equal to the divisor saved in the divisor buffer (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S742. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the dividend saved in the dividend buffer is equal to or larger than the divisor saved in the divisor buffer (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S746.

Step S742: The main control CPU72 executes a process of subtracting the divisor saved in the divisor buffer from the dividend saved in the dividend buffer, and saving the subtraction result as a new dividend in the dividend buffer.

Step S744: The main control CPU72 adds the integer stored in the integer buffer to the quotient saved in the quotient buffer, and saves the addition result as a new quotient in the quotient buffer.

Step S746: The main control CPU72 executes a process of dividing the divisor saved in the divisor buffer by "2" (shifting to the right by one bit), and saving the division result as a new divisor in the divisor buffer.

Step S748: The main control CPU72 divides the integer saved in the integer buffer by "2" (shifts to the right by one bit), and saves the division result as a new integer in the integer buffer.

Step S750: The main control CPU72 sets a value obtained by adding 1 to the current task (current value of the next task) to the next task.

Upon completion of the above processing, the main control CPU72 returns to the performance display monitor total division processing (FIG. 67).

When "9" is set in the next task, the division task 9 shown in FIG. 70 is executed.
The flow of processing of the division task 9 will be described below.

Step S752: The main control CPU72 executes a process of confirming whether the value of the least significant bit of the quotient saved in the quotient buffer is "1".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient saved in the quotient buffer is “1” (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S754. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient saved in the quotient buffer is “1” (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S756.

Step S754: The main control CPU72 divides the quotient stored in the quotient buffer by "2" (shifts to the right by 1 bit), adds "1" to the division result, and stores it in the base buffer. ..

Step S756: The main control CPU72 divides the quotient stored in the quotient buffer by "2" (shifts to the right by one bit), and stores the division result in the base buffer.

Step S758: The main control CPU72 sets "10 (value corresponding to standby processing)" to the next task.

Upon completion of the above processing, the main control CPU72 returns to the performance display monitor total division processing (FIG. 67).

When “10” is set in the next task, the division task 10 is executed. The content of the division task 10 is not particularly shown, but a standby process is executed after the division is executed. In the final processing of the division task 10, “0” is set in the next task.

Next, the display mode of the performance display monitor 200 and the method of calculating the base (base ratio) displayed on the performance display monitor 200 will be described.

FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the performance display monitor 200.
The main controller 70 displays the base on the performance display monitor 200 when the gaming state is the low-probability non-time shortened state, the high-probability non-time shortened state, and when the left-handing instruction is given. Here, the base is calculated for each preset section (for example, for every 60000 total outs). The base (percentage: %) can be calculated by base=normal prize ball number/normal out number×100.

As shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 71, the performance display monitor 200 switches between the base of the current section and the base of the previous section at preset intervals (for example, several seconds). Is displayed.

In the performance display monitor 200, the seven segments 201 and 202 display an identifier “bL.” or “b6.” for identifying the base of the current section or the base of the previous section. Further, on the performance display monitor 200, the bases corresponding to the identifiers “bL.” or “b6.” are displayed as two-digit numerical information by the seven segments 203 and 204.

For example, assuming that the base of the current section is 30%, when displaying the base of the current section, “bL.” is displayed in 7 segments 201 and 202 as shown in (A) of FIG. Then, “30” is displayed on the seven segments 203 and 204. Also, assuming that the base of the previous section is 38%, when displaying the base of the previous section, “b6.” is displayed in the seven segments 201 and 202 as shown in FIG. 71(B). Then, “38” is displayed on the seven segments 203 and 204.

FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the base section displayed on the performance display monitor 200.
Here, from the time the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured to the time when it is installed in the hall (game hall) and played by the player, inspections during manufacturing and trial operation (operation check) in the hall are performed. Be seen. Game balls will be emitted and discharged during inspections during manufacturing, trial runs in the hall, etc., but if the number of out balls and the number of discharges during this period are counted, the game is played by the player. There is a risk that the base cannot be calculated accurately during the period.

Therefore, as shown in (A) of FIG. 72, the first section (non-target section) in which the total number of out balls detected by the out switch 99 (total number) is 0 to 300 is inspected during manufacturing, It is regarded as the number of out balls detected before the game is played by the player, such as a test drive in the hall, and is excluded from the base calculation target.

Similarly, the number of payouts paid out in the section where the number of out balls is 0 to 300 is also excluded from the base calculation target. In this non-target section, as shown in (B) in FIG. 72, when the base of the current section is displayed, the identifier “bL.” is displayed in blinking and “−−” is displayed as the value of the base. Light up and display. Further, since the previous section does not exist, when the base of the previous section is displayed, the identifier “b6.” is blinked and the value of the base is “−−”.

Then, the number of out balls is from 301 to 60300 as the first section, and in the first section, the base is calculated at any time (in real time), and when displaying the base of the current section, the identifier "bL." Is displayed and the calculated base value is lit up. At this time, when the number of out balls is from 301 to 6299 (while the number of out balls in the section is 5999 or less), the identifier “bL.” is displayed in a blinking manner to calculate the base of the current section. Informs that the base is not stable because there are few samples. After that, when the number of out balls becomes 6300 or more (the number of out balls in the section becomes 6000 or more), the identifier "bL." is lit and displayed, and many samples are used when calculating the base of the current section. , Informs that the base is stable.

Further, in the first section, since the previous section does not exist, when displaying the base of the previous section, the identifier “b6.” is displayed blinking and “−−” is lit as the value of the base. indicate.

Also, in the second section in which the number of out balls is 60301 to 120300, the base is calculated at any time (in real time) as in the first section, and when the base of the current section is displayed, the number of out balls is calculated. The identifier "bL." is lit or blinked in accordance with the above, and the calculated base is displayed. In addition, when the base of the previous section is displayed in the second section, the identifier “b6.” is lit and displayed, and the final base of the first section is lit and displayed.

In this way, the base calculated in real time is displayed as the base of the current section for every 60,000 balls (every nth section) excluding the first 300 out balls, and the n-1th section is displayed. The final base of is displayed as the base of the previous section.

As a result, it is possible to exclude the number of out balls and the number of discharges before the game is played by the player such as the inspection at the time of manufacturing and the trial operation (operation check) in the hall from the target for calculating the base. It can be accurately calculated (displayed).

When calculating the base, the base may temporarily exceed 100%. For example, when the first one ball of the section enters the medium starting prize hole 26, the number of out balls is 1, while the payout number is the prize ball obtained by entering the medium starting prize hole 26. It becomes a number (for example, 4), and the base becomes 400%. In such a case, since the performance display monitor 200 can display the base only with two-digit numerical information, "99." is lit to indicate that the base exceeds 100%.

FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating a base calculation method.
Here, a method of calculating the base will be described assuming that the number of normal prize balls is “3456” and the number of normal outs is “10000”.

As described above, the base is a value obtained by finally converting the number of emitted balls with respect to the number of out balls for each section into a percentage. When displaying such a percentage, only two digits after the decimal point are necessary for the result of division.

Then, the process of calculating such a percentage value (the process of “converting to%”) corresponds to the multiplication of the multiplicand “100”. Therefore, it can be expressed by the formula: base=number of normal prize balls/number of normal outs×100. However, when the number of normal prize balls≦the number of normal outs, if the calculation is performed in the order of this expression, the value after the decimal point becomes a value, and for example, the main controller 70 cannot calculate.

Therefore, the calculation order is changed, and the calculation is performed in the order of base=normal prize ball number×100÷normal out number (first, the normal prize ball number is multiplied by the multiplicand, and then the normal prize number is divided). By doing so, it is possible to complete the calculation result using only integers without performing calculations below the decimal point.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value after the decimal point when converted into a percentage is rounded off.
However, since the main controller 70 cannot handle the numbers below the decimal point and operates in binary numbers, the number of normal prize balls×multiplicand “100” and the normal out number are first doubled to obtain the base 2 value. Find the doubled value. If the least significant bit (corresponding to the value below the decimal point) of the value twice the calculated value (binary number) is “1” (if the number below the decimal point is 0.5 or more), the calculated base Rounding up the fractional part by adding "1" to the doubled value and then halving the value (shifting 1 bit to the right), the least significant bit of the doubled value of the calculated base (equivalent to the value after the decimal point) ) Is “0” (if the number after the decimal point is less than 0.5), the value twice the obtained base is half the value as it is (shifted to the right), and the number after the decimal point is truncated. As a result, values below the decimal point can be rounded off.

Specifically, in the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), the division is replaced with the subtraction, and from the dividend “691200”, which is 2×normal prize ball number (3456)×100, the normal out number, the divisor “10000”. Is subtracted by a number obtained by multiplying a power of 2 by a predetermined integer “128 (2×2 6 )”, and thereafter the integer is “64 (2×2 5 )”→“32 (2×2 to the 4th power)”→“16 (2×2 to the power of 3)”→“8 (2×2 to the power of 2)”→“4 (2×2 to the power of 1)”→“2(2 ×2 to the 0th power)”→“1 (2×2 to the 1st power)” (shifted to the right by 1 bit), multiplied by a divisor, and subtracted from the dividend. Here, the integer that multiplies the divisor starts from 2x64 when the display of the base is in the range of 0 to 99, and "99.9" is displayed when the base is 100% or more. Therefore, it is not necessary to subtract a numerical value of “2×128 (2 to the 7th power)” or more.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73, since the dividend is less than the divisor in the first calculation, the process proceeds to the next step. Then, in the second operation, since dividend ≧divisor, the dividend “691200” is subtracted from the divisor “64(2×32)×10000” to update the dividend to “51200” and the quotient “0” to “64”. Is added to update the quotient to “64 (1000000B in binary)”. In the third to fifth calculations, the dividend is less than the divisor, so the next step is performed. In the sixth operation, since the dividend is not less than the divisor, the dividend “51200” is subtracted from the divisor “4(2×2)×10000” to update the dividend to “11200” and the quotient “64” to “4”. In addition, the quotient is updated to "68 (1000100B when expressed in binary)". In the seventh calculation, since the dividend is less than the divisor, the next step is performed. In the eighth calculation, since dividend ≧divisor, the dividend “11200” is subtracted from the divisor “1(2×0.5)×10000” to update the dividend to “1200” and the quotient “68” to “1”. Is added to update the quotient to “69 (1000101B in binary)”.

After that, in the ninth operation, the updated quotient “69 (1000101B in binary notation)” is divided by 2 (shifted to the right by 1 bit) to obtain the final base. At this time, if the quotient is simply divided by 2, the quotient becomes "34.5". However, as described above, since the main control unit 70 cannot handle the fractional part, the lowest bit of the quotient is "1B". After shifting the quotient “69” to the right by 1 bit, “1” is added and the quotient is set to “35 (0000111B in binary)”.

According to such an operation example, it becomes possible to realize division by only simple operations such as addition, subtraction, and multiplication, and by using only integers. Further, here, it is sufficient to repeat the calculation 9 times, so that the calculation process can be performed quickly. In addition, the base can be rounded to the nearest whole number.

[Setting-related processing basic operation]
74 to 76 are timing charts showing the basic operation of the setting-related processing.

FIG. 74 shows an example of the case where the process related to the setting reference (mode for confirming the setting) is executed.
FIG. 75 shows an example of a case where a process related to setting change (mode for changing the setting) is executed.
FIG. 76 shows an example when a RAM abnormality occurs.

In addition, (A) in each drawing shows the ON or OFF state of the power supply.
(B) in each figure shows the ON or OFF state of the setting key.
(C) in each figure shows the ON or OFF state of the RAM clear switch 304.
In each figure, (D) shows the ON or OFF state of the setting switch. When the RAM clear switch 304 also serves as the setting change switch, either (C) in each figure or (D) in each figure is omitted, or (C) in each figure and each In the figure, (D) can be combined.

In each figure, (E) shows the contents displayed on the performance display monitor 200.
In each figure, (F) shows an ON or OFF state of external information (for example, a security signal).
In each drawing, (G) shows the contents displayed on the error display (for example, the liquid crystal display 42).
(H) in each figure shows the change of the game state.
In each figure, (I) shows the state of the switch.

[Refer to settings]
74(A): The power is off at time t1, and the power is on at time t3.

74(B): The setting key is turned on at time t2, and the setting key is turned off at time t6. The setting key needs to be OFF from time t6 to time t7, but after time t7, the setting key may be ON or OFF.

In FIG. 74(C): the RAM clear switch is OFF from time t1 to time t5. After time t5, the RAM clear switch may be ON or OFF.

74D: The setting switch is OFF from time t1 to time t3. After time t3, the setting switch may be ON or OFF.

74(E): The performance display monitor 200 is hidden from time t1 to time t5. From time t5 to time t7, the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value. After time t7, the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

74(F): External information is OFF from time t1 to time t3. External information is ON from time t3 to time t6. External information is OFF after time t6. The ON state of the external information may be extended until time t7. The external information may be output for at least a fixed time (50 ms) or longer.

In FIG. 74(G): the error display is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. From time t5 to time t6, the error display is a setting reference display. The setting reference display displays, for example, the character information of “setting reference” on the liquid crystal display 42. After time t6, the error display is hidden. The setting reference display may be extended until time t7. The external information and error display periods are the same as the setting reference end period, but they do not have to match. The setting reference end period is a processing time required for shifting from the setting reference end to the normal game. The shortest time for ending the setting reference can be set to 0 ms.

In FIG. 74 (H): The game state is the power interruption from time t1 to time t3. The game state is activated from time t3 to time t4. From time t4 to time t5, the game state is switch confirmation. From time t5 to time t6, the game state is the setting reference. From time t6 to time t7, the game state is the setting reference end. After time t7, the game state is the normal game.

74(I): From time t1 to time t4, all the switches are in the invalid state. From time t4 to time t7, the state of the switch is invalid except for the switch related to the setting changing device. After time t7, all switches are valid.

〔setting change〕
In FIG. 75(A): the power is off at time t1, and the power is on at time t3.

75(B): The setting key is turned on at time t2 and turned off at time t6. The setting key needs to be OFF from time t6 to time t7, but after time t7, the setting key may be ON or OFF.

75(C): The RAM clear switch is OFF from time t1 to time t3. The RAM clear switch is ON from time t3 to time t5. After time t5, the RAM clear switch may be ON or OFF. The RAM clear switch may be ON (or may be pressed) at time t2, like the setting key.

75(D): The setting switch is OFF from time t1 to time t3. From time t3 to time t5, the setting switch may be ON or OFF. Each time the setting switch is pressed from time t5 to time t6, the setting switch is turned on. After time t6, the setting switch may be ON or OFF.

75(E): The performance display monitor 200 is hidden from time t1 to time t5. From time t5 to time t7, the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value. After time t7, the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

75(F): External information is OFF from time t1 to time t3. External information is ON from time t3 to time t6. The external information is OFF from time t6 to time t8. The ON state of the external information may be extended until time t7. External information is ON from time t8 to time t9. External information is OFF after time t9. The external information may be output for at least a fixed time (50 ms) or longer. The external information (security/initialization) output from time t8 to time t9 may be output for a fixed time (50 ms) or more, and the external information may be output continuously depending on the output timing of the external information. ..

75(G): The error display is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. From time t5 to time t6, the error display is a setting changing display. The setting change display is, for example, to display the character information "setting change" on the liquid crystal display 42. The error display is not displayed from time t6 to time t7. The setting change display may be extended until time t7. The error display is an initialization display from time t7 to time t10. In the initialization display, for example, the liquid crystal display 42 displays the character information “Initialization completed”. After time t10, the error display is hidden.
The external information and the error display period are the same as the setting change end period, but they do not have to match. The setting change end period is a processing time required for shifting from the setting change end to the normal game. The shortest time for ending the setting change can be set to 0 ms.

In FIG. 75 (H): the game state is the power interruption from time t1 to time t3. The game state is activated from time t3 to time t4. From time t4 to time t5, the game state is switch confirmation. From time t5 to time t6, the game state is the setting change. From time t6 to time t7, the game state is the setting change end. After time t7, the game state is the normal game.

In FIG. 75, (I): From time t1 to time t4, all the switches are disabled. From time t4 to time t7, the state of the switch is invalid except for the switch related to the setting changing device. After time t7, all switches are valid.
It is preferable to execute the RAM clear from time t5 to time t7.

[When RAM is abnormal]
76(A): The power is off at time t1, and the power is on at time t3.

76(B): At time t1, the setting key is OFF. After time t1, the setting key may be ON or OFF.

76(C): At time t1, the RAM clear switch is OFF. After time t1, the RAM clear switch may be ON or OFF.
With regard to the setting key and the RAM clear switch, when the condition for shifting to the setting change is satisfied, the setting key and the RAM clear switch may be shifted to the setting change state.

76(D): At time t1, the setting switch is OFF. After time t1, the setting switch may be ON or OFF.

76(E): The performance display monitor 200 is hidden from time t1 to time t5. After time t5, the performance display monitor 200 displays the content corresponding to the error.

76(F): External information is OFF from time t1 to time t5. External information is ON after time t5.

76(G): The error display is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. After time t5, the error display is a game stop display. The game stop display is, for example, to display character information such as "error occurring" or "game stop" on the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 76 (H): The game state is the power interruption from time t1 to time t3. The game state is activated from time t3 to time t4. From time t4 to time t5, the game state is switch confirmation. After time t5, the game state is game stopped.

In FIG. 76, (I): From time t1 to time t4, all switches are disabled. From time t4 to time t7, the state of the switch is invalid except for the switch related to the setting changing device. After time t5, all switches are invalid.

In addition to the basic configuration of the above timing chart, the following modifications are possible.
(1) As a condition for changing to the setting change state (setting change mode) or the setting reference state (setting reference mode), the condition "opening the inner frame" is also set, and "setting key OFF and When the frame is closed for a certain period of time (100 ms), the setting change state or the setting reference state ends.
(1a) The setting change state or the setting reference state may be ended when the setting key OFF state continues for a certain time (for example, 100 ms) without considering the state of the inner frame.

(2) When the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is OFF, the setting confirmation state (setting change state) or the setting reference state ends.

(3) Before starting the setting reference, the power recovery process is performed. When the checksum is abnormal, the RAM is cleared. Even in this case, the setting change flag, the set value, and the outside of the area are not cleared.
(3a) When the checksum is abnormal, the setting change flag, the set value, and the memory outside the area may be cleared to set the RAM abnormal error state.

(4) When the setting change or the setting reference condition is satisfied, the setting change flag is set. In this case, the setting change flag is set in the initial flow (for example, the CPU initialization process), and the setting change flag is set based on the contents of the setting change flag during the execution of the timer interrupt process after the transition to the main loop. Execute the process of setting reference.

(5) When the setting change is completed, jump to the beginning of the program (for example, CPU initialization processing), generate a checksum error, and clear the RAM other than the set value.

(6) Immediately after the setting is determined, the game is ready (it shifts to the normal game state). In other words, it is not a condition that the RAM is cleared again after the setting is confirmed, or that a predetermined time has passed before the normal game shifts.
(6a) For the reason such as preparation of the effect control device, it is possible to set only a predetermined time as a condition.

(7) During the setting change, the game stop flag is set so that the processing related to the game is not performed.
(8) A common main loop process or a common timer interrupt process is used during the normal game, the setting change, and the setting reference.

(9) A common timer interrupt during normal game, setting change, and setting reference is at least one of dynamic port output processing, port input processing, external information management processing, and port output processing.

(10) Different main loop processing and different timer interrupt processing are used during normal game, setting change, and setting reference.
(11) The timer interrupt by the first timer (timer 0) is used during the normal game, and the timer interrupt by the second timer (timer 1) is used during the setting change and the setting reference. The interrupt period may be the same or may be changed.

(12) The same RAM clear switch and setting change switch are used (shared).
(13) Separate RAM clear switches and setting change switches are used (do not combine).

The following is a modification of the security signal.
(14) The security signal is output only while the setting is being changed, and is not output while the setting is being referred.
(15) A security signal is output during changing the setting and referring to the setting to change the output time. For example, the security signal is output for 30 seconds during the setting change, and the security signal is output for 5 seconds during the setting reference.

(16) Both the security signal and the out signal are output during the setting change.
(17) A "setting change signal" is newly added, and during the setting change, the newly added "setting change signal" is output.

(18) One of the existing signals (big hit signal 4 etc.) is used as a setting change signal and is not used in conventional applications.
(19) While the setting is being changed, the "security signal" and the "setting change signal" are output.

(20) A security signal is output each time the setting change switch (RAM clear switch) is pressed during the setting change.
(21) When the setting is confirmed, output of the security signal is started. When the setting is confirmed, output of the security signal ends.

(22) When the setting is confirmed, the pulse of the setting change signal is output for the set number of times (for example, the number of times the setting change switch is pressed, the number of times corresponding to the set value after the decision).
(23) When the setting key is ON during the normal game (when the setting key is turned), the security signal is output.

[Example of power-on processing]
77 to 79 are diagrams showing a processing example when the power is turned on.

FIG. 77 shows a first processing example in the case where the previous power-off is in the normal game and the RAM is normal (the backup flag is normal) when the power is restored.
FIG. 78 shows a second processing example in the case where the last power-off is in the process of setting reference and the RAM is normal when the power is restored.
FIG. 79 shows a third processing example in the case where the RAM is abnormal (the backup flag is abnormal) when the power is restored, regardless of the previous power-off condition.

As shown in FIG. 77, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, (1) the contents of the memory (RAM 76) are cleared except for the data related to the setting related process and the performance display monitor related process. Then, (2) after the power is turned on, the state is changed to the setting change state, and (3) the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value.

Further, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (4) the contents of the memory are not changed, (5) after power-on, the setting reference state is entered, and (6) performance display The monitor 200 displays the set value.

Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is ON, (7) the contents of the memory are cleared except for the data related to the setting related processing and the performance display monitor related processing, and (8) after the power is turned on. Shifts to the normal game state, and (9) the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (10) the contents of the memory are not changed, (11) after the power is turned on, the normal game state is entered, and (12) performance. The display monitor 200 displays the base.

As shown in FIG. 78, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, (1) the contents of the memory (RAM 76) are cleared except for the data related to the setting related process and the performance display monitor related process. Then, (2) after the power is turned on, the state is changed to the setting change state, and (3) the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value.

Further, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (4) the contents of the memory are not changed, (5) after power-on, the setting reference state is entered, and (6) performance display The monitor 200 displays the set value.

Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is ON, (7) the contents of the memory are cleared except for the data related to the setting related processing and the performance display monitor related processing, and (8) after the power is turned on. Shifts to the normal game state, and (9) the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (10) the contents of the memory are not changed, and (11) after the power is turned on, the setting reference state or the normal game state is entered, (12) The performance display monitor 200 displays the set value or the base. It should be noted that, in the case of shifting to the setting reference state in the above (11), it is preferable to display the set value in the above (12), and in the case of shifting to the normal game state in the above (11), the base in the above (12). Is preferably displayed.

As shown in FIG. 79, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, (1) the content of the memory (RAM 76) clears data other than the data related to the performance display monitor, and (2) ) After the power is turned on, the state changes to the setting change state, and (3) the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value. In the above (1), when the RAM has an abnormal value, the data relating to the performance display monitor-related processing may be cleared.

Also, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (4) the contents of the memory are not changed, (5) the game is stopped after the power is turned on, and (6) performance display The monitor 200 displays an error code (for example, "E" is displayed).

Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is ON, (7) the contents of the memory are not changed, (8) the game is stopped after the power is turned on, and (9) performance display. The monitor 200 displays the error code.

Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (10) the contents of the memory are not changed, (11) the game is stopped after the power is turned on, and (12) the performance. The display monitor 200 displays the error code.

Then, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute the processing of the contents described in FIGS. 74 to 79 by the main control device 70 or the effect control device 124. The contents of the processing described in FIGS. 74 to 79 may not be executed depending on the model.

[Launch position management processing]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the firing position management process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S1100: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the normal game management phase is "03H" to "07H".

[Normal game management phase]
The main control CPU72 sets the value (in the brackets) of the normal game management phase according to the progress status (1) to (8) of the game corresponding to the normal symbol as follows.
(1) Normal symbol fluctuation waiting state: "00H"
(2) Normal symbol variation display state: "01H"
(3) Ordinary symbol stop symbol displaying state: "02H"
(4) Variable start prize winning device (normal electric accessory) Waiting for opening: "03H"
(5) Variable start prize device (normal electric accessory) Open state: "04H"
(7) Variable start prize device (normal electric accessory) closed state: "05H"
(8) Variable start prize winning device (normal electric accessory) During operation end time State: "06H"
(9) Valid state after closing the variable start winning device (normal electric accessory): "07H"

Here, when the value of the normal game management phase is set or updated, the main control CPU72 generates a normal game management phase command that reflects the value. The normal game management phase command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the normal game management phase is “03H” to “07H” (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S1140. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the normal game management phase is "03H" to "07H" (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S1110.

Step S1110: The main control CPU72 confirms whether the value of the special game management phase is "03H" to "07H".

[Special game management phase]
The main control CPU72 sets the value (in brackets) of the special game management phase according to the progress status (1) to (8) of the game corresponding to the special symbol, for example, as follows.
(1) Special symbol fluctuation waiting state: "00H"
(2) Special symbol fluctuation display state: "01H"
(3) Special symbol stop symbol displaying state: "02H"
(4) Waiting state for opening variable winning device (special electric accessory): "03H"
(5) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) open state: "04H"
(6) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) closed state: "05H"
(7) Variable prize winning device (special electric accessory) During operation end time State: "06H"
(8) Effective state after closing the variable winning device (special electric accessory): "07H"

Here, when the value of the special game management phase is set or updated, the main control CPU72 generates a special game management phase command that reflects the value. The special game management phase command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

As a result, when the value of the special game management phase is "03H" to "07H", that is, when it is confirmed that the big hit game or the small hit game is being played (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S1140. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is “03H” to “07H” (No), that is, if it is not possible to confirm that the big hit game or the small hit game is being played, the main control CPU 72 makes a step. Execute S1120.

Step S1120: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the internal state is the time shortening state. Whether or not it is in the time reduction state can be confirmed by the time reduction function operation flag.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the time reduction state (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S1140. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the internal state is the time reduction state (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S1130.

Step S1130: The main control CPU72 sets the value (0) corresponding to left-handing in the firing position designation status.

Here, the “launch position designation status” is a variable that holds whether the current game state is a game state corresponding to left hitting or a right hitting.
Specifically, if "0" is set in the launch position designation status, it indicates that the current gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to left hitting (left hitting state), and the launch position specifying status is "1". Is set, it indicates that the current game state is a game state corresponding to right-handedness (right-handed state).

For this reason, the main control CPU72, by referring to the value of the launch position designation status, it is possible to confirm whether the current game state is a game state corresponding to left hitting or a game state corresponding to right hitting. it can.
Further, the value of the firing position designation status is stored in the RAM 76, and when the power-off state occurs, the value is backed up.

Step S1140: The main control CPU72 sets the value (1) corresponding to right-handed to the firing position designation status.

Step S1150: When the firing position designation status is set in step S1130 or step S1140, the main control CPU72 then generates a firing position designation command (fire position designation information notifying means). Here, the main control CPU72 generates a command reflecting the value of the firing position designation status as the firing position designation command. Specifically, when the value of the firing position designation status is a value (0) indicating left-handedness, the main control CPU72 generates a firing position designation command indicating left-handedness. On the other hand, when the value of the firing position designation status is the value (1) indicating right-handedness, the main control CPU72 generates a firing position designation command indicating right-handedness. The firing position designation command generated here is output to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

[Game flow in non-time-saving state]
FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a game flow in the non-time shortened state.

When starting a game with a pachinko machine, the game is started from [F0] non-time shortened state [F1] normal mode. In the "normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is "low probability state", and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is "low probability state". In this way, since the [F1] normal mode is in the "low probability non-time shortened state", by inserting the game ball into the middle start winning port 26, the first special symbol starts changing and the game is started. proceed.

The [F0] non-time reduction state includes the [F2] festival mode in addition to the [F1] normal mode. [F2] The festival mode is a low-probability or high-probability non-time reduction state.

In the [F2] festival mode, if the [F3] prescribed condition (for example, the condition that the special symbol has changed 10 times in the low probability non-time shortened state) is satisfied, the process shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

In [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, if [F4] "11 round normal symbol" or "11 round probability variation symbol 11" is met, [F5] 11 round jackpot game (challenge bonus) is executed, In [F6] treasure challenge production, [F7] failure production is executed, and [F2] festival mode is entered.

[F6] The treasure challenge effect is a probability variation promotion judge effect that is executed using the first to tenth variations after the jackpot game is over.

In [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, if [F8] "11 round probability variation pattern 1-10" is met, [F5] 14 round jackpot game (challenge bonus) is executed, and [F6] treasure challenge The [F9] success production is executed in the production, and the process shifts to [F10] fireworks rush. [F10] The firework rush is in a high probability time shortened state.

In [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, if [F11] "15 round probability variation pattern 1" is met, [F12] 15 round jackpot game (special bonus) is executed, and [F10] fireworks rush Transition. In this case, the [F6] treasure challenge effect is not executed.

In [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, if [F13] "6 round certainty variation design" or "8 round certainty variation design" is applied, 6 mode big hit game or 8 round big hit game and mode transition effect are executed. , [F10] Fireworks rush.

[Game flow with reduced time]
FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating a game flow in the time reduction state.

The [G0] time reduction state is roughly divided into [G1] fireworks rush (high probability time reduction state) and [G2] coast mode (low probability time reduction state).

[G1] Fireworks rush or [G2] In coast mode, if [G3] "15 round probability variation pattern 2 to 7" or "3 round probability variation pattern" is met, [G4] Battle reach effect executed during variable display In [G5] victory effect is executed, [G6] After the 15 round jackpot game (fireworks bonus) is over, the process shifts to [G1] fireworks rush.

On the other hand, in [G1] fireworks rush or [G2] coast mode, if [G7] "5 round normal design" is met, [G4] defeat production is executed in battle reach production executed during variable display. After the [G9] 5-round big hit game (normal bonus) is finished, the [G2] coast mode is entered.

In addition, in [G1] fireworks rush or [G2] coast mode, if [G10] "5 round probability variation pattern" is met, [G4] defeat production is executed in battle reach production executed during variable display. However, [G9] 5 round big hit game (normal bonus) is being executed, [G11] big role promotion effect (reverse effect, revival effect, probability variation promotion effect is executed), after the big hit game, [G1] Move to fireworks rush.
It should be noted that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all the flow of games.

[Example of effect image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. Be displayed (pattern display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol themselves are lit/blinking display by the 7-segment LED, so that they are not appealing visually. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect pattern is performed as described above.

The effect symbols include, for example, three effect symbols including a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in the left, middle, and right directions (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is, for example, a design of a picture card to which a character is attached together with the numbers "1" to "9". Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all constitute a symbol row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a symbol string is variably displayed so as to vertically flow (scroll) in the left area, the middle area, and the right area on the screen.

FIG. 83 is a continuous diagram showing an example of effect images corresponding to variable display and stop display of special symbols. It should be noted that here, regarding the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (out), an example of the variation display effect and the stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbol is shown. This variable display effect is a line between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but it may be the second special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of directed productions. The stop display effect is an effect in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the internal lottery at that time is expressed as a combination of the effect symbols. Here, first, before describing the specific contents of the control process, a basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
In FIG. 83 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts changing (a state where the demonstration effect is not in progress), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large in the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed.

[Memory number display effect]
Further, in the pre-change display area X1 at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (indicated by reference symbols M1 and M2 in the drawing) indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. As for these markers M1 and M2, the respective display numbers represent the first special symbol, the operation memory number of the second special symbol (the display number of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a). And, the number of displays increases or decreases in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game.

As for the markers M1 and M2, in order to facilitate visual discrimination, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, for example, in the shape of a circle (◯), and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure. In the example shown in the figure, all four markers M1 are lit to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are non-display (shown by broken lines). The number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbols, for example, a fourth symbol (with reference symbols Z1 and Z2 in the figure) is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left/middle/right effect symbols, and during variable display of effect symbols, they are variably displayed in synchronization with this. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely simple marks (for example, a figure of "□") colored, and for example, variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the deviation. This is for objectively clarifying that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is, for example, "15 round jackpot", rather than "defeat", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, red display color) corresponding thereto. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 may be displayed by LEDs arranged on the board, instead of being displayed on the liquid crystal screen.

[Begin changing display]
In FIG. 83(B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the variable display effect is started by scrolling fluctuation of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (effect execution). means). That is, in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is scrolled vertically (flowing) so that the variable display is performed. The production is started. Further, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-change display area X1 of the strip portion in the lower part of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of the change, but are displayed in the lower left part of the liquid crystal display 42 after the start of the change. The display moves to the changing display area X2 based on the displayed pedestal image, and continues to be displayed until the change of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed (the changing memory display effect). In addition, in the figure, the variable display of the effect design is simply indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the variable display, the individual effect symbols are displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), and at this time, the background image of the effect symbol is displayed in the display screen in a state where it is easy to see. Has been done.

In this case, the background image represents a scene in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if he or she is in the evening cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, the “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the time reduction function is inactive and the probability variation function is inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for production, and a background image having a different landscape or scene is prepared for each mode (state display production execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. Although not shown in particular here, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the notice production is performed after that, for example, by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like in the display screen.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing its display color.

[Stop left pattern]
In FIG. 83(C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the change time) has passed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "8" is stopped at the left side position of the screen. Note that the illustration of the background image is omitted here (the same applies hereafter).

[Demonstration example when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) in FIG. 83 above, the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of variation, so that the number of markers M1 displayed is linked with that. It has been reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memory numbers by then, only one of the oldest (old) memory number display in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is also combined. Done. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the working memory number has been consumed for the first special symbol even in the production.

Then, in the example of (C) in FIG. 83, since the marker M1 at the beginning in the storage order is moved to the changing display area X2, the remaining display in the pre-change display area X1 becomes three. An effect is produced in which the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted one by one in one direction (here, to the left). As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed on the performance, and for the player, "the working memory is consumed and decreased by one" and "the working memory is consumed and a special symbol is given. Is fluctuating” can be taught intuitively and easily.

[Right production design stop]
In FIG. 83 (D): Following the left effect design, the right effect design stops changing thereafter. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "3" is stopped at the inner position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that a reach state will not occur at this point, it is almost apparent that the change this time is a non-reach (normal) change. Here, reach variation due to slip patterns and the like is excluded. The "slip pattern" means, for example, once the effect design representing the number "7" has stopped, the design row slides by one design and the effect design representing the number "8" stops, and thereby develops to reach. Is to do. Alternatively, once the effect symbol representing the number “9” has stopped, the symbol string slips backward by one symbol and the effect symbol representing the number “8” stops, and thus the pattern that develops to reach is also stopped. is there. In addition, after the production symbol representing a completely different number such as "5" is once stopped, when a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol sequence is changed again, the number "8" is represented. There is also a pattern in which production patterns stop and develop into reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 83 (E): In synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol, the last medium effect symbol is stopped. If the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (out) mode, the effect display is also stopped and displayed in the non-winning (outside) mode. Be seen. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number "1" is stopped at the middle position of the screen, and in this case, the effect symbol combination is "8"-"1"-"3". Since it is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the fluctuation this time corresponds to a normal “delamination”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the deviation.

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 which has moved to the changing display area X2 and continued to be displayed is also hidden. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the change of the special symbol has ended".

The above is an example of the variable display effect and the stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed by using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can be expected to win, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught on the effect.

Further, although the above-described example is for non-winning, after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect during the big hit (winning), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) internally selected by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

[Demonstration example during a big hit]
FIG. 84 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (winning). At the time of a big hit, different effects can be executed according to the winning symbol. Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (pre-reach notice effect, post-reach notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

The reach production below is, for example, after the variable display according to the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is performed on the first special symbol display device 34, the first special symbol is a big hit mode (for example, "self" and "yo" of the 7-segment LED). , “Mouth”, “Mimi”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ”, etc.) are executed (reach effect execution means). In addition, in FIG. 84, each effect symbol is simplified and shown only in the figure. The markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown here. Hereinafter, description will be given along the flow of the production. Further, although the following reach effect is a normal reach effect, a super reach effect (not shown) different from the following reach effect may be executed depending on the selected variation pattern.

[Variable display production]
In FIG. 84 (A): For example, a row of left effect symbols, middle effect symbols, and right effect symbols on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is in the vertical direction (for example, from the top in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol). The variable display effect is started by scrolling downward.

[Preliminary notice production before reach (first stage)]
In FIG. 84(B): Next, in the relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first-stage pre-reach advance notice effect using the picture image (picture card) of the character is performed. The pre-reach advance notice effect is a notice effect in which the change of the mode progresses step by step from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The design image used in this pre-reach notice production is located in front of the production design that is variably displayed on the screen, and is displayed so as to appear, for example, from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes). But you can.) It should be noted that the "preliminary notice before reach" means that the possibility of reach or the possibility of a big hit is given before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such “pre-reach notice production”, it is possible to obtain the effect that the player has the expectation that “it may develop into reach=the possibility of a big hit increases”.

[Preliminary notice production before reach (second stage)]
In FIG. 84(C): after the first stage aspect of the pre-reach occurrence advance notice effect is executed, the change of the aspect of the pre-reach advance notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, as a notice effect before the second stage reach occurrence, an effect using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. Further, the size of the picture image displayed at this time is larger than that of the picture image previously displayed. Then, the production by the sound output, in which the character expressed by the picture image utters a dialogue (for example, "I will reach," etc.), is also performed.

The pre-reach occurrence notice effect (second stage) using such a second picture image goes one step further from the pre-reach occurrence notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 84(B). It is a development type. In this way, the “pre-reach notice announcement effect” that develops in this way is generally referred to as “step-up notice” or the like. Here, an example is shown in which the second-stage design image appears in the pre-reach notice production, but in the production mode in which the third-, fourth-, and fifth-stage design images appear and appear one after another. It may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the pattern images of the third stage, the fourth stage, and the fifth stage appear and are displayed one after another. Even at this stage, the variable display of effect symbols is continued. In any case, by advancing the change in the form of the pre-reach advance notice production to more stages, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (a high degree of expectation) of a big hit in this change. (For example, suggesting the maximum degree of expectation when progressing to the fifth stage.)

[Stop of left production design]
In FIG. 84 (D): approaching the middle period of the variable display effect, and eventually the variable display of the left effect design is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the left side position of the screen.

[Generation of reach state]
84(E): Then, following the left effect design, for example, the variable display of the right effect design is stopped. At this time, the reach state of "5"-"changing"-"5" has occurred because the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the right side position of the screen. Then, on the screen, an image that emphasizes one line in the reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” is also performed.

After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point, the result of winning has not been expressed yet.). In the reach effect, only the effect symbol corresponding to the ten-tempered number (here, “5”) is displayed on the screen, and the other symbols are not displayed. At this time, the effect design may be displayed in a reduced state at each of the four corners of the screen.

[Advance notice after reach (first time)]
In FIG. 84 (F): Shortly after the reach state occurs, for example, an image representing the figure of “heart” forms a group and passes diagonally on the screen, and a notice effect after the reach occurrence (first time) is performed. .. In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen as if flowing, so that it is possible to enhance the visual appeal to the player. By executing the notice production after the visually noticeable reach notice is generated, it is possible to obtain the effect of making the player have a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 84 (G): Following the notice effect after the first occurrence of reach, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a state of forming a three-dimensional column on the screen, and The effect that the numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of "2", "3", "4"... Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (indicating) to the player that the number "5" is a "big hit" when it is left without being erased until the end, or reminding the player. Also, it means that if the number "4" is erased and "5" remains in front of the screen, it is a "big hit", and if the number "5" is also erased, it is "out." In the case of the deviation, for example, the number "6" is displayed on the screen after the number "5" is erased. Therefore, during this period, as the images are erased in order of the numbers "2", "3", "4", the player's sense of tension and expectation also increase. Then, if the number "4" is actually erased on the screen and the production progresses with the number "5" remaining on the screen, the possibility of a "big hit" increases, so there is a sense of tension in the player. Also suddenly increases.

[Advance notice after reach (second time)]
In FIG. 84 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character suddenly appears on the screen as if it is split into a large copy, and the character utters some dialogue (or silently. A notice effect (second time) will be given after the occurrence of the reach (smiley is acceptable). At this point, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that "if the number "5" remains without being erased, the possibility of a big hit of "5"-"5"-"5" is increased. Therefore, by causing a large image of the character to appear at this timing, it is possible to obtain the effect of making the player have an expectation that “it may be a big hit”.

As another reach effect different from the above, there is a development that, for example, "the numbers "2" to "4" are erased, and if the number "5" is left without being erased at the end, it is a big hit". When the image of the character appears at such a timing, it is possible to obtain the effect of making the player have an expectation that "a big hit may be near".

[Intermediate production design stop]
In FIG. 84 (I): The last medium effect design is stopped. In this example, the effect symbol representing "5" is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen.

In FIG. 84 (J): And, for example, substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol, the stop display is also performed for the stop display effect as the effect symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are respectively restored to the initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, it is possible to teach the player that the final winning type has been finalized in the effect.

If the result of the internal lottery is non-win, the first special symbol, which is the current variation target, is stopped and displayed in the off symbol, so that the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in the same manner. In this case, by displaying numbers "4" and "6" other than "5" in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is given to notify that the change has not been a big hit. It should be noted that such an effect is executed as an "outside reach effect".

[Challenge bonus production (production during major role)]
FIG. 85 is a view showing an example of the challenge bonus effect.
The challenge bonus effect is executed during the jackpot game in the case of corresponding to "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbol".

[1 round]
In FIG. 85 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, a big win production effect having contents corresponding to the progress status of the game of "big hit" is executed. In the major performance effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect design (here, the number "1") corresponding to the winning design of this time is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called "left eye") during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information that "the winning symbol is 1". Further, the characters "Challenge Bonus" are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and an image of a horse character is displayed around the screen.

Further, during the big hit game (during special game), the character information of "right hitting" is displayed, and an arrow symbol indicating the right side portion in the game area 8a is displayed (launch position designation effect).

[5 rounds]
In FIG. 85 (B): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and shifts to 5 rounds, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 5" is displayed in the screen and is unique to the big hit game. The effect image of is displayed. The actual big hit game continues until 11 rounds, but after the 6th round, the big winning opening is short-opened (for example, open for 0.1 seconds) in each round. Therefore, this fifth round is the actual final round.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 85 (C): at the timing when the big hit game ends, a big role end effect that transmits effect contents to be executed after this is executed. In this example, the character information “Treasure Challenge Enter!” is displayed on the screen.

[Production example of the treasure challenge production]
FIG. 86 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the treasure challenge effect.
The treasure challenge production is a probabilistic promotion judge production executed using the first variation to the tenth variation after the jackpot game in the case of "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbol". is there. In the Treasure Challenge production, the horse character searches for treasure, and if it can find the treasure, it will enter the fireworks rush. The flow of the production will be described below step by step.

In FIG. 86 (A): After the jackpot game in the case of "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbol", the first variable display is performed, so that "treasure challenge production" Is started. As for the effect design, the variable display effect is executed in the state of being reduced at the upper left corner position of the screen (“changing”-“changing”-“changing”). Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

[Game explanation production]
When the treasure challenge effect is started, the game explanation effect is first executed. In the example shown in the figure, a hermit character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and a performance is performed in which the hermit character utters the line "If you can find the treasure, it's a fireworks rush!"

Further, during the treasure challenge (during time reduction/probability change), character information of “right hit” is displayed, and an arrow symbol indicating the right side portion in the game area 8a is displayed (launch position designation effect). When the treasure challenge is successful, the launch position designation effect continues to be executed as it is because the right-handed state continues (see (C) and (E) in the figure), but the treasure challenge fails. In this case, the state is left-handed, so the process ends (see (F) in the figure).

[11 round probability variation pattern 1 winning]
In FIG. 86 (B): When the previous jackpot corresponds to “11 round probability variation pattern 1”, the number of special fluctuations is one, so the success production is executed in the first treasure challenge production. Specifically, a production in which a horse character finds treasure is executed. Then, the word "success" is displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the production in which the character of the hermit emits the line "amazing!" is executed.

[At the end of fluctuation]
In FIG. 86 (C): Since the first variation (at the time of non-winning) after the jackpot game is over, all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (“1”-“2”-“3”). .. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, white display color).

In addition, at this timing, an effect of teaching the player an internal state to be transferred after this is executed. In the example shown in the figure, the text information “Fireworks rush rush!” is displayed on the screen. By executing such an effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “high probability time shortened state” fireworks rush.

[11 round probability variation design 2-11 or 11 round normal design winning]
In FIG. 86 (D): On the other hand, in the case of winning in either “11 round probability variation symbols 2 to 11” or “11 round normal symbol”, the failure effect is executed in the first treasure challenge effect. Then, the character "Failure" is displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the production in which the character of the hermit speaks "sorry" is executed.

[At the end of fluctuation]
In FIG. 86 (E): Since the first variation (at the time of non-winning) after the jackpot game is over, all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (“4”-“5”-“6”). .. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, white display color).

In addition, at this timing, an effect that teaches the player that the treasure challenge effect will continue is executed. In the illustrated example, the character information “Treasure Challenge Continue!” is displayed on the screen. Then, in the case of corresponding to "11 round probability variation symbols 2 to 10", the treasure challenge production is continued until the special variation set for each winning symbol ends, and finally, in the treasure challenge production. Success production is executed.

[At the end of fluctuation]
In FIG. 86 (F): On the other hand, if it corresponds to “11 round normal symbol” or “11 round probability variation symbol 11”, the failure effect is executed even in the 10th variation (non-winning) after the jackpot game is over. To be done. In addition, at this timing, an effect of teaching the player an internal state to be transferred after this is executed. In the example shown in the figure, the character information "Festival mode has entered!" is displayed on the screen. By executing such an effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the festival mode of “low probability or high probability non-time shortened state”. In the high probability non-time shortened state, if the “11 round probability variation pattern 11” is applied, the number of time saving is set to 10,000 times, so the success effect is executed in the tenth variation after the jackpot game is over. be able to.

[Example of a fireworks rush]
FIG. 87 is a continuous view showing an example of the effect of a firework rush.
The fireworks rush is in a high probability time shortening state, and unless the winning result is obtained after the big hit game, it continues until the special symbol changes 10,000 times. The flow of the production will be described below step by step.

In FIG. 87 (A): The effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the state of “fireworks rush”. The background image of the firework rush is a background image expressing "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" in order to give the player a deep impression of the fireworks motif. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed in the upper right portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Further, during the probability change (during a high probability time reduction state), the character information of “right hit” is displayed, and an arrow symbol pointing to the right side portion in the game area 8a is displayed (launch position designation effect).

In FIG. 87 (B): And after the jackpot game is over, the first variation (at the time of non-winning) is over, so that all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (“3”-“1”-“7”). )). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, white display color).

In FIG. 87 (C): When the next variation starts, the variation display for the second time after the end of the big hit game is displayed. In the high-probability time shortened state, the variable start winning device 28 is operated at a high frequency, so as long as the player continues to right-hand, the variable display of the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. It is often seen.

[Fireworks bonus production]
FIG. 88 is a continuous view partially showing an example of the fireworks bonus effect.
The fireworks bonus effect is an effect that is executed during the jackpot game in the case of corresponding to “15 round probability variation pattern 2 to 7” or “3 round probability variation pattern”.

[1 round]
In FIG. 88 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, a big win production effect having contents corresponding to the progress status of the game of "big hit" is executed. In the large-effect display, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. In addition, in the upper right area of the display screen, the characters "fireworks bonus" are displayed, and in the center of the screen, an image of an animal character that straddles a horse is displayed.

Further, during the big hit game (during special game), the character information of "right hitting" is displayed, and an arrow symbol indicating the right side portion in the game area 8a is displayed (launch position designation effect).

[Final round]
In FIG. 88 (B): After this, the big hit game progresses smoothly and shifts to the final round. For example, when 15 rounds of big hits are being executed, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 15" is displayed on the screen.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 88 (C): at the timing when the big hit game ends, a big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after this is executed. In the example shown in the figure, the text information “Fireworks rush rush!” is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the “high probability time shortened state” fireworks rush as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Normal bonus production]
FIG. 89 is a continuous view partially showing an example of the normal bonus effect.
The normal bonus effect is an effect executed during the jackpot game in the case where the "5 round normal symbol", the "5 round probability variation symbol" or the like is applied.

[1 round]
In FIG. 89(A): When the first round of the big hit game in the normal bonus effect is started, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. Further, the character "Normal Bonus" is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the image of the dog character is displayed in the center of the screen.

Further, during the big hit game (during special game), the character information of "right hitting" is displayed, and an arrow symbol indicating the right side portion in the game area 8a is displayed (launch position designation effect).

[5 rounds]
In FIG. 89 (B): After that, the big hit game progresses smoothly, and when the final five rounds are shifted, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND5" is displayed on the screen and the big hit game is being performed. An effect image peculiar to is displayed.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 89 (C): At the timing (during the ending time) when the big hit game ends when “5 round normal symbol” is applied, a big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after this is executed. In the example shown in the figure, the character information “Coastal mode entry!” is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coast mode of the "low probability time reduction state" as a privilege after the big hit game is finished. In addition, when it corresponds to the "fifth round probability variation pattern", the major role promotion effect is executed during the execution of the normal bonus effect, and the fireworks rush is performed.

[Example of production in coastal mode]
FIG. 90 is a continuous view showing an example of the effect in the coast mode.
The coast mode is shifted after the jackpot game in the case where the "5 round normal symbol" corresponds to the time shortened state. The coast mode is a "low probability time reduction state". The flow of the production will be described below step by step.

In FIG. 90 (A): The effect symbols are displayed in a varying manner in the "coast mode". The background image in the coast mode is a background image with images such as “sand beach”, “sea”, and “mountain” as a motif in order to express the impression of healing which is the concept of the coast mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, during the time saving (the low probability time shortening state), the character information of "right hitting" is displayed, and the arrow symbol indicating the right side portion in the game area 8a is displayed (launching position designation effect).

In FIG. 90 (B): Then, all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5") due to the end of this variation (at the time of non-winning). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, white display color).

90(C): Then, the next fluctuation starts. This coast mode ends when the special symbol changes 100 times without obtaining a winning result. When the coast mode ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode with a low probability non-time reduction state. In addition, when the result of the winning is obtained in the coast mode, the reach effect is executed and a big hit occurs.

Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The variable display effect, the reach effect, the notice effect before the reach occurrence, the memory number display effect, the effect in effect, etc. are all controlled through the following control processing.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process separately from the reset start process of the effect control device (not shown), for example. The performance control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, several tens μs to several ms cycle) during execution of the reset start process of the performance control device, and executes the timer interrupt process.

Production control processing, command reception processing (step S400), operation memory production management processing (step S401), production design management processing (step S402), launch position designation production management processing (step S403), display output processing (step S404). , Lamp driving processing (step S406), acoustic driving processing (step S408), effect random number updating processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, a basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU72. Further, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 by type. In addition, the command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU72, for example, special figure destination determination effect command, (special symbol) operation memory number increase effect command, (special symbol) operation memory number decrease effect command, start opening Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop time command, state designation command, number of rounds command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, cut number of times Counter value command, fluctuation pattern destination determination command, stop display time end command, prize ball content command, launch position designation command, normal game management phase command, special game management phase command, power supply restoration designation command, RAM clear designation command, setting confirmation There are designated commands, etc.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls execution of the memory number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the operation memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, and the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. Controls the contents of production. In addition, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of various notice effects (pre-reach notice notice effect, post-reach notice notice effect, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S403: In the shooting position designation effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the shooting position designation effect (shooting position designation effect execution means). Specifically, when the content of the launch position designation command is a value that is right-handed, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a launch position designation effect.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 causes the VDP 152 to have basic control information of effect contents (for example, the number of operation memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the operation memory effect pattern number, the prefetch notice). The effect pattern number, the variable effect pattern number, the notice effect number at the time of change, the background pattern number, etc.) are designated. As a result, the VDP 152 controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect contents (effect execution means).

Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driver IC 132. In response to this, the driver IC 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in brightness gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53, etc. based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next sound driving process, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the sound IC 134 about effect contents (for example, during changing display effect, during reach effect, during mode transition effect, during big hit effect, sound data, etc.). .. As a result, the speaker 54, 55, 56 outputs a sound according to the effect contents.

Step S410: In the effect random number updating process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection and random numbers used for normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates with the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of an image on the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-described production control processing, the production control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the production contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the working memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory performance management process]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation memory effect management process. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is received from the main control CPU72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is stored. When it is confirmed that the effect command when the number of operating memories is increased is stored (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702 and step S703. In addition, when it is not possible to confirm that the effect command for increasing the number of operation memories is stored (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S702 and step S703.

Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect memory increase effect effect selection processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Step S703: The effect control CPU 126 executes a prefetch effect management process (prefetch effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a determination process as to whether or not to execute the prefetch effect (marker change effect, zone effect, continuous effect, etc.), and when it is determined to execute the prefetch effect, the prefetch effect is performed. The process of determining the specific contents of is executed.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126, when the execution condition of the look-ahead effect is satisfied (when the special effect execution condition is satisfied), is executed over a plurality of variations of the special symbol. The pre-reading effect can be executed (pre-reading effect executing means).

Step S704: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the production memory time reduction production command is received from the main control CPU72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the effect command for decreasing the number of working memories is stored (step S704: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S706. In addition, when it is not possible to confirm that the effect command for decreasing the number of operation memories is stored (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect memory number decrease effect effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 is changing the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery, the effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol from the pre-variation display area X1. An effect to be moved to the display area X2 is selected. The memory marker moved to the changing display area X2 selects an effect to be erased at the end of the change.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 91).

[Production symbol management processing]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol management process. Production symbol management processing (production execution means), execution selection processing (step S500), production symbol variation pre-processing (step S502), production symbol variation processing (step S504), production symbol stop display processing (step S506) and This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508) during operation of the variable winning device. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the production control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the production symbol management processing as the return destination address in the “jump table”. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, if the variable display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change preprocessing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the production symbol variation pre-process has already been completed, the production control CPU 126 selects the production symbol variation process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the production symbol variation process is completed, As the jump destination of, the production symbol stop displaying process (step S506) is selected. In addition, the variable winning device operating process (step S508) is a case where the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning variable winning device managing process (step S5000 in FIG. 33) or the small winning variable winning device managing process (FIG. 33). When step S6000) is selected, the jump destination is selected. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the production symbol variation pre-processing, the production control CPU 126 performs a work of adjusting the conditions for starting the variable display production using the production symbol. Further, in this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), and an effect pattern for the notice effect (reach other than the prefetch notice effect pattern. (Pre-occurrence notice pattern, reach notice notice pattern, etc.) can be selected. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The details of the specific processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information for instructing the VDP 152 as necessary. For example, when performing the effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player operates the effect button, and the effect corresponding to the result. The control information of the contents (button effect) is instructed to the VDP 152.

Step S506: In the effect symbol stop displaying process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in a mode according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the VDP 152 to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the VDP 152 ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be taught (disclosed, notified, notified, etc.) to the player (effect execution means). ). At the time of a small hit, the stop display effect can be executed in a manner similar to or close to the loss.

Step S508: In the process at the time of operating the variable winning device, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect content during the small hit or the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the effect during major effect in accordance with various conditions (e.g., winning type). For example, in the case of a 15-round big hit, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 15-round big effect effect pattern as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the VDP 152. As a result, the image of the major effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the content of the effect changes as the round progresses.

[Production pattern change preprocessing]
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the above-mentioned production symbol variation preprocessing. Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure.

Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether the demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether the demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, if it is confirmed that the demonstration effect command is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the end address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 directly returns to the effect control process, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 91) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 91). To do.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the variation this time is out (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. It should be noted that the confirmation of whether or not the current variation is not possible can be performed based on the variation pattern command or the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the variation pattern command of this time corresponds to the out-of-order normal variation or the out-of-bounds reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of alignment.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the change this time is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is not stored (No), the only remaining lottery result command at the time of the small hit is, so in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. In addition, it is also possible to confirm whether or not the variation this time is a big hit, based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the variation pattern command of this time corresponds to a big hit variation, it can be determined that the present variation is a big hit. Further, if the current stop symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is the big hit.

Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to an effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. In addition, the effect pattern number may be prepared in combination with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be provided for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and changes the effect pattern of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable effect pattern number at that time (fluctuation time, reach type and reach occurrence timing), and stops. The display mode and the like are determined. The types of effect symbols determined here all correspond to “combination of symbols at the time of small hit”.

The above procedure is for a case of "small hit", but when it is a big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, "E0H00H" to "F0H7FH") received from the main control CPU72. In the big hit production effect pattern selection processing, the processing may be further branched for each big hit stop pattern. The details of the specific processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, if the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), then step S612 is executed.

Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes the off-time variation effect pattern selection processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of departure based on the variation pattern command (for example, "A0H00H" to "A6H7FH") received from the main control CPU72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of falling out are classified into "outside normal fluctuation", "time saving outlying fluctuation", "outside reach fluctuation", and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in "outside reach fluctuation". It is to be noted that which effect pattern number the effect control CPU 126 selects is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the production pattern number at the time of departure is selected, the production control CPU 126 refers to a production table (not shown), and a variation schedule of the production symbol corresponding to the variation production pattern number at that time (variation time, presence/absence of reach occurrence, in the case of reach occurrence) Determines the reach type and reach generation timing), and the stop display mode (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.). The details of the specific processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

When the processing of any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes an announcement selection process (annotation effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice production is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or the possibility of a big hit eventually. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set relatively high at the time of winning in order to increase the player's expectation.

As described above, when the effect control CPU 126 wins the lottery as to whether or not to execute the notice effect (when the prescribed effect execution condition is satisfied), the effect control CPU 126 wins during the execution of the variable display effect (predetermined effect). An advance notice effect indicating that the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode (related to a predetermined effect indicating the success or failure of the predetermined effect) is executed (notice effect execution means).

Further, when the effect control CPU 126 determines to execute the notification effect in the notification selection process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining at which timing during the variable display the notification effect is started. It should be noted that, in the notice production, various notice productions executed during the variable display (step-up notice production, conversation notice production, cut-in notice production, group notice production, role drop production, next notice production, title color change production. ) As well as pseudo continuous notice production, prefetch notice production, memory marker change notice production, etc.

Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes a mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is “normal mode (low probability non-time shortened state)”, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image in which the female character is sitting on the chaise longue. When the stay mode is “fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state)”, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image having a fireworks motif. Furthermore, when the stay mode is the “coast mode (low probability time reduction state)”, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image having the coast as a motif.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent production symbol variation process (step S504 in FIG. 93), the variation display production and the stop display production are executed based on the actually selected variation production pattern (production execution means), and various types. The notice production is executed based on the notice production pattern.

[Change production pattern selection process during big hit]
FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the big-difference variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure.

Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. Thereby, it is possible to confirm what kind of big hit fluctuation pattern the fluctuation this time is.

Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the loaded variation pattern is a special variation pattern.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation pattern is the special variation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S804, and when it is not possible to confirm that the current variation pattern is the special variation pattern (No). The effect control CPU 126 executes step S806.

Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process per special variation pattern. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that is a big hit in the treasure challenge effect.

Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes the reach after hit effect selecting process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern such as a normal reach effect or a super reach effect according to the type of the change pattern (the length of the change time).

Then, when the process of step S804 or step S806 is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol pre-change process (FIG. 94).

[Variation effect pattern selection process at the time of leaving]
FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the off-time variation effect pattern selection processing. Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure.

Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. This makes it possible to confirm what kind of out-of-range variation pattern this variation is.

Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the loaded variation pattern is a special variation pattern.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation pattern is the special variation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S826, and when it is not possible to confirm that the current variation pattern is the special variation pattern (No). The effect control CPU 126 executes step S824.

Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the loaded fluctuation pattern is a deviation fluctuation pattern after the reach.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation pattern is the deviation variation pattern after the reach (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S828, and it is not possible to confirm that the variation pattern this time is the deviation variation pattern after the reach. In the case (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S830.

Step S826: The effect control CPU 126 executes the special variation pattern outlying effect selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes the treasure challenge effect during the change of the special symbol, and continues the treasure challenge effect based on the type of the last winning symbol, shifts to the firework rush, or enters the festival mode. Select the effect pattern to be transferred.

Step S828: The effect control CPU 126 executes the after-reach effect effect selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes the reach effect on the basis of the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72, and selects an effect pattern that is out of reach.

Step S830: The effect control CPU 126 executes non-reach out-of-reach effect selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects, based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72, an effect pattern that is out of alignment if the reach effect is not executed.

Then, when the processing of any of step S826, step S828 or step S830 is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol pre-change processing (FIG. 94).

[Mode effect management process]
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of mode effect management processing. Hereinafter, description will be given along with an example of the procedure.

Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is the time shortened state (low probability time shortened state or high probability time shortened state). Specifically, the production control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the state designation command, and confirms whether the internal state is the time shortening state.

As a result, when it is not possible to confirm that the internal state is the time reduction state (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the time shortened state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S852.

Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern. This confirmation can be performed by confirming the variation pattern command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S854.

Step S854: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the last winning symbol is the “5-round normal symbol”. To confirm which symbol the previous winning symbol corresponds to, and which state the previous internal state was, the RAM 130 stores information regarding the winning symbol and information regarding the internal state during the previous winning. It can be realized by

As a result, when it is not possible to confirm that the last winning symbol is the “5-round normal symbol” (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S860. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the last winning symbol is the “5-round normal symbol” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S862.

Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the non-time shortened state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image in the “normal mode” or a background image in the “festival mode”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 basically executes the process of selecting the background image in the “normal mode” in the low probability non-time shortened state. Moreover, after the treasure challenge effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the background image of the “festival mode”, and when the special symbol changes a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times) in the low probability non-time shortened state, the “normal mode” is selected. The process of selecting the background image of “” is executed.

Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the treasure challenge effect.

Step S860: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the firework rush.

Step S862: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process of selecting the background image for the coast mode.

Then, when the process of any of steps S856 to S862 is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol pre-change process (FIG. 94).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of a process at the time of operating the variable winning device. The variable winning device operating process is a subroutine of an execution selection process (step S902), a variable winning device operating pre-process (step S904), a variable winning device operating process (step S906), and a variable winning device operating post process (step S908). This is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the process at the time of operating the variable winning device will be described along with each process.

Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S904 to S908) from the “jump table”. For example, the production control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable prize winning device operating process as the stack destination address in the stack pointer.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, in a situation where the variable winning device operation pre-processing has not started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. If the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S906) as the next jump destination. Further, if the process during the operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the post-operation process of the variable winning device (step S908) as the next jump destination.

Step S904: In the variable winning device operation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game.

For example, in the case of “11 round normal symbol” and “11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11”, processing for selecting a challenge bonus effect is executed.
In addition, when it corresponds to “15 round probability variation design 1”, the processing which selects the special bonus production is executed.
Furthermore, when it corresponds to the "6 round probability variation pattern" or the "8 round probability variation pattern", a process of selecting a major role effect (mode transition effect) that suddenly shifts to the firework rush is executed.

On the other hand, when it corresponds to “15 round probability variation pattern 2 to 7” or “3 round probability variation pattern”, the process of selecting the firework bonus effect is executed. In addition, when it corresponds to "5 round probability variation design," during the execution of the normal bonus effect (5 round jackpot effect), a process of selecting an effect for executing the major role promotion effect is executed. Furthermore, when it corresponds to "5 round normal design", the process which selects the production which executes normal bonus production (5 round big hit production) is executed.

Step S906: In the process during operation of the variable winning device, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information for instructing the VDP 152 as necessary. For example, when performing the effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the big hit effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player operates the effect button, and the effect content (button effect) corresponding to the result is monitored. Instruct control information to the VDP 152.

Step S908: In the process after the operation of the variable winning device, the effect control CPU 126 executes the effect of transmitting the destination mode to the player during the ending time of the variable winning device.

The effect control CPU 126 executes a coast mode rush effect or a fireworks rush rush effect according to the winning symbol. Specifically, in the case of hitting the “11 round normal symbol” and “11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11”, the process of selecting the effect indicating the entry into the “treasure challenge” is executed. , "15 round certainty variation pattern 1", "15 round certainty variation design 2 to 7", "3 round certainty variation design", "5 round certainty variation design", if it corresponds to the fireworks rush, the production indicating that Is executed, and if it corresponds to the "5-round normal pattern", the process of selecting an effect indicating entry into the coast mode is executed.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the following effects are obtained.
(1) According to the present embodiment, since the main control device 70 transmits the payout operation stop command (prohibition command), the payout control device 92 does not execute the payout of game balls, so the main control device 70 and the payout are performed. Even though there are two devices such as the control device 92, the setting of only the main control device 70 side prevents the payout of game balls during the setting change or the setting reference (during the setting related process). be able to. As a result, it is not necessary to modify the program of the payout control device 92, and the overall control process can be simplified, and as a result, an efficient control process related to setting can be executed. If the setting change/setting reference start command is adopted as the prohibition command, the program of the payout control device 92 needs to be modified, but the payout operation stop command and the setting change/setting reference start command are different from each other. Since they can be distinguished as commands, the control content becomes clear, and as a result, efficient control processing regarding settings can be executed.

(2) According to the present embodiment, when the gaming machine has a function of a payout operation stop command (prohibition command, command for prohibiting payout of gaming balls when the door of the pachinko machine 1 is opened), By effectively utilizing it, it is possible to control the payout of the game balls without changing the program of the payout control device 92, and it is possible to execute efficient control processing relating to the setting.

(3) According to the present embodiment, the main control device 70 transmits the payout operation stop command to the payout control device 92 to shift the payout control device 92 to the payout impossible state, and the payout control device 92 plays a game. Since the payout of the ball is not executed, the payout of the payout control device 92 can be easily prohibited only by the control regarding the command, and the efficient control processing regarding the setting can be executed.

(4) According to the present embodiment, the main control device 70 can transmit the prohibition command to the payout control device 92, and the payout control device 92 can shift to a state in which the command cannot be transmitted. In this way, on the main control device 70 side, the command is not transmitted from the payout control device 92 during setting change or setting reference (during execution of setting related processing). The control process of can also be simplified.

(5) In the present embodiment, the main control device 70 transmits a payout operation stop command (prohibition command) before a lapse of a certain time after the start confirmation command is transmitted, and the payout control device 92 dispenses from the dispensable state. In order to restrict the shift to the possible state, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 92 from executing the payout of game balls without changing the flow of transmitting the start confirmation command, and changing the program of the main control device 70. Can be suppressed, and efficient control processing regarding settings can be executed.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and can be variously modified and implemented. The form of the effect described in the embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the above-described form of the effect.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a so-called loop type (type in which a substantial upper limit is not set for the number of probability changes) has been described, but an ST type (a substantial upper limit is set for the number of probability changes). The present invention may be applied to (type) gaming machines.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that does not have a probability variation area has been described, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that has a probability variation area.

In the embodiment described above, the first process is the timer interrupt process and the second process is the serial communication reception interrupt process. However, the first process may not be the interrupt process. For example, the first process may be a main loop process and the second process may be a timer interrupt process or a serial communication reception interrupt process.

In the above-described embodiment, when executing the interrupt non-permission processing, the example in which the interrupt prohibition processing is executed before executing the interrupt non-permission processing has been described, but in the case where the interrupt is already prohibited, The interrupt non-permission processing may be executed without executing the interrupt prohibition processing.
For example, the interrupt permission process (step S201a) and the interrupt prohibition process (step S163) may not be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, as the special information (special program code/special program data) to be arranged in the use area, the determination process of determining whether or not to calculate the base based on the gaming state in the process of calculating the base, Also, the example in which the information regarding at least one of the confirmation processing for confirming the value of the number of prize balls is included is explained, but the special information includes the processing other than the determination processing and the confirmation processing in the processing for calculating the base. May be included, and the special information may include only information regarding the determination process or only information regarding the confirmation process.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that does not employ "simultaneous turning of the first special symbol and the second special symbol" has been described, but for gaming machines that employ the simultaneous spinning. However, the present invention can be applied. In this case, it is possible to add the gaming property of the small hit rush (the gaming property in which the small hit prize is frequently generated in the second special symbol lottery).

When the simultaneous rotation is adopted, for example, the gaming machine can be provided with at least one of the following configurations.
(1) During the period in which the first special symbol changes, the second special symbol can also change.
(2) Depending on the gaming state, the average variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be set to a long time or a short time.
(3) In the latent probability change state (high probability non-time shortened state), the average fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be set to a shorter time than other gaming states (for example, normal state, low probability non-time shortened state, etc.) And, the small hit winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is set high (if it is not a big hit, the small hit is won with a probability of 100% or close to it), and the big winning opening during the small hit game is won. Thereby, it is possible to set the number of balls to be increased even when the big hit game is not executed in the latent probability change state.
(4) In the latent probability variation state, the game proceeds in a right-handed state.

In the above-described embodiment, the example of the gaming machine including the performance display monitor and the setting changing device has been described, but in this case, the gaming machine may include at least one of the following configurations.
(1) When setting is provided, the set value can be displayed on the performance display monitor.
(2) A plurality of types of winning probability of the special symbol lottery (for example, winning probability of the jackpot lottery) are stored, and one of the probabilities can be set by operating a predetermined operation member or the like.
(3) Which probability is set (which setting) can be displayed on the performance display monitor 200. In this case, for example, after the base value is displayed, the display is switched to the display of the set value periodically, a place to be turned on according to the set value (a place where the LED is turned on according to the set value) is provided, or the set value is changed. The identifying information can be displayed.

The following modifications are possible for the out switch 99 (out sensor).
(1) Although one OUT switch 99 is arranged in the confluence passage (total discharge passage) of the game board unit 8, the OUT switch 99 may be arranged not in the game board unit 8 but in the total discharge passage on the main frame side. .. In this way, the main body frame may be used as it is even if the game board unit 8 is replaced (because it may be reused), so that it is more costly than mounting the out switch 99 on the game board unit 8. It can lead to reduction.

(2) Even if the number of out balls is calculated by providing an out switch inside or near each winning opening and each out opening on the game board unit 8 side and adding up the values detected by each out switch. Good.

(3) On the game board unit 8, an out sensor is provided near the exit of the launch rail or near the entrance to the right-handed area to detect a game ball that has been hit in the game area before winning or out. You may ask for the number. In addition, a plurality of out switches 99 may be provided instead of one, and may be provided on the game board unit 8 (on the game area) like a gate.

In the above-described embodiment, whether or not the big hit game is being executed, whether or not the time is in a shortened state, and whether or not the value of the firing position designation status is "1" (whether or not right-handing is instructed) Although an example of determining whether or not to calculate the base by three items such as ()) has been described, whether or not the value of the firing position designation status is “1” (whether or not right-handing is instructed) Whether or not the base is calculated may be determined by only one item such as.

Also, depending on the game specification, any two of the above three items or only any one item may be determined, and the combination thereof can be freely set. For example, in the case of a game specification that does not have a time-reduced state or right-handed state, it is possible to judge only one item of "whether or not a big hit game is being executed", or a time-reduced state or right-handed state. Even if the state is provided, it is possible to determine whether or not to calculate the base with only one item of "whether or not the big hit game is being executed".

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a value obtained by dividing the number of normal prize balls by the number of normal outs is displayed as the base to be displayed on the performance display monitor 200 has been described. You may display the value divided by the number of out during the game.

In the above-described embodiment, as a calculation method for calculating the base, the base is calculated by obtaining a value (quotient) that is twice the normal out number and then shifting the quotient to the right by 1 bit. The method may be used to calculate the base.

In the above-described embodiment, when the lowest bit of the quotient is “1B” when obtaining the final base, the quotient is shifted to the right by 1 bit and then “1” is added to calculate the base. However, if the least significant bit of the quotient is "1B", the base may be calculated by adding "1" to the quotient and then shifting it to the right by 1 bit.

Main controller 70 may cause performance display monitor 200 to perform a power-on operation when the power is turned on.
In the power-on operation, the four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 (may include a dot segment) of the performance display monitor 200 have a predetermined pattern in order to confirm the operation after the power is turned on until the display of the base is started. It is an operation of lighting for a predetermined time by (all blinking, all lighting, sequential lighting, etc.).

The lighting in such a predetermined pattern may be performed before displaying the set value, or after displaying the set value, as long as it is before displaying the base.
When the lighting is performed in a predetermined pattern before displaying the set value, the setting value cannot be displayed until the lighting in the predetermined pattern ends, but when the lighting is performed in the predetermined pattern after displaying the setting value, There is an advantage that the set value can be confirmed early.

The performance display monitor 200 has been described with an example in which, when displaying the base, the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are switched and displayed, but the display pattern is not limited to this. It is also possible to store the bases of more than two sections, such as the section base, the previous section base, and the two-preceding section base, and switch and display them.

The images given in the other performance examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board configuration, specific numerical values and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

The following technical ideas can be extracted from the above-described embodiments.
(1) The first technical idea is to perform any one of "normal recovery", "RAM clear recovery", "setting reference mode", and "setting change mode" by operation.
The gaming machine includes a setting change device and two input devices (switches), and when the power is restored, the game machine shifts to one of four states (normal restoration, RAM clear restoration, setting reference mode, and setting change mode). Four states are determined by a combination of two input devices (four combinations of ON/OFF).

One of the input devices is preferably a setting key switch. A setting switch, a RAM clear switch, other switches, or the like can be applied to the other input device.
The setting is confirmed when one of the input devices is turned off during the setting change. In the conventional technique, since the setting is confirmed by turning the lever ON, there is no technique in which the setting is confirmed when one of the input devices is turned OFF.
The setting during the setting change may be confirmed by another operation (for example, pressing of a confirmation switch provided separately or other processing).

The gaming machine has a first input device (a switch that detects the operating state of a setting key) that can be turned on and off for setting changes, and a second input device (a RAM clear switch pressed state that can be turned on and off for setting changes). And a means for setting four states (normal restoration state, RAM clear restoration state, setting reference mode state, setting change mode state) by a combination of the first input device and the second input device.

(2) The second technical idea is a configuration in which, when the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor, it is displayed within the usage area.
The gaming machine includes a performance display monitor capable of displaying the base and a setting change device capable of changing the set value, and displays the set value on the performance display monitor.
The process of displaying the set value on the performance display monitor is executed outside the area.

(3) The third technical idea is a configuration in which the original process related to the performance display monitor is not performed during the setting change (reference).
The gaming machine executes a first process related to the performance display monitor and a second process related to setting change, and limits at least a part of the execution of the other process while the one process is being executed.
Further, the determination process of whether or not to limit is executed outside the area.

(4) The fourth technical idea is a reset process for main command permission.
The gaming machine does not receive the command from the payout control device 92 by not setting the main command permission signal on the main control device 70 side during the setting change or the setting reference, and prohibits the payout of the payout control device 92. doing.

(5) The fifth technical idea is to transmit a command indicating that the setting is being changed from the main control to the payout control.
The gaming machine transmits a payout operation stop command from the main control device 70 side to prohibit payout of the payout control device 92 while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to.

(6) The sixth technical idea is a configuration in which when the setting change is completed, the saving process is performed when the power is cut off.
The gaming machine executes a first process that is not related to the setting change and a second process that is related to the setting change, and executes at least a part of the first process after the second process is completed.
Further, the gaming machine is provided with a means for executing a process when power is restored, and a means for performing a setting-related process relating to setting change or setting reference, and after execution of the setting-related process, at least one of the processes when the power is restored. Run the department.

(7) The seventh technical idea is a configuration relating to the setting key as a switch for shifting to the “setting change state” or the “setting confirmation state”.
The gaming machine can change the setting using the setting key, has an inserting section for inserting the setting key, ON/OFF of the setting key, and when the setting key is ON, the setting key is inserted from the inserting section. The setting can be changed without coming off, and when the setting key is OFF, the setting key comes out of the insertion part and the setting cannot be changed.
Further, in the gaming machine, if the setting key is turned off during the setting change, the setting is confirmed.

1 Pachinko machine 8 game board unit 8a game area 20 start gate 28 variable start winning device 33 normal symbol display device 33a normal symbol working memory lamp 34 first special symbol display device 35 second special symbol display device 34a first special symbol working memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol working memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Production switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (2)

A main controller that controls the contents of the game,
A payout control device that can communicate with the main control device and pays out game balls based on a payout command transmitted from the main control device;
The main controller is
When a lottery trigger occurs during the game, a lottery executing means for executing a predetermined lottery,
At least a setting change device capable of changing the setting relating to the winning probability of the predetermined lottery,
Setting-related process execution means for executing a setting-related process including at least one of a setting change process executed when changing the setting or a setting reference process executed when referring to the setting;
During execution of the setting-related processing, by transmitting a prohibition command for prohibiting payout of game balls to the payout control device, prohibition processing for executing prohibition processing for preventing the payout control device from paying out game balls A gaming machine comprising an executing means. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The payout control device,
A start command is transmitted to the main control device, and a start confirmation command for the start command is received to shift from a payout impossible state to a payout possible state, and the main control device transmits the payout possible state in the payout possible state. Paying out game balls based on the payout command,
The prohibition processing execution means is
A game machine characterized in that by transmitting the prohibition command to the payout control device, the payout control device is shifted to the payout impossible state, and the payout control device is not allowed to pay out game balls.